WO2000027640A1 - Printer and methods of operation - Google Patents

Printer and methods of operation Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2000027640A1
WO2000027640A1 PCT/AU1999/000984 AU9900984W WO0027640A1 WO 2000027640 A1 WO2000027640 A1 WO 2000027640A1 AU 9900984 W AU9900984 W AU 9900984W WO 0027640 A1 WO0027640 A1 WO 0027640A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
contone
printhead
layer
printer
dither
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/AU1999/000984
Other languages
French (fr)
Inventor
Kia Silverbrook
Paul Lapstun
Simon Robert Walmsley
Original Assignee
Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Priority claimed from AUPP7024A external-priority patent/AUPP702498A0/en
Priority claimed from AUPP7025A external-priority patent/AUPP702598A0/en
Priority to KR1020047017977A priority Critical patent/KR100576642B1/en
Priority to AU15336/00A priority patent/AU1533600A/en
Priority to DE69940824T priority patent/DE69940824D1/en
Priority to KR1020047017984A priority patent/KR100577056B1/en
Priority to KR1020047017980A priority patent/KR100576605B1/en
Priority to JP2000580843A priority patent/JP2003508827A/en
Application filed by Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd filed Critical Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd
Priority to KR1020047017978A priority patent/KR100576744B1/en
Priority to KR1020047017982A priority patent/KR100577088B1/en
Priority to KR1020047017979A priority patent/KR100577025B1/en
Priority to AT99957714T priority patent/ATE430443T1/en
Priority to EP99957714A priority patent/EP1128961B1/en
Priority to KR1020047017985A priority patent/KR100622619B1/en
Priority to KR1020047017987A priority patent/KR100577357B1/en
Publication of WO2000027640A1 publication Critical patent/WO2000027640A1/en

Links

Classifications

    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B41PRINTING; LINING MACHINES; TYPEWRITERS; STAMPS
    • B41JTYPEWRITERS; SELECTIVE PRINTING MECHANISMS, i.e. MECHANISMS PRINTING OTHERWISE THAN FROM A FORME; CORRECTION OF TYPOGRAPHICAL ERRORS
    • B41J2/00Typewriters or selective printing mechanisms characterised by the printing or marking process for which they are designed
    • B41J2/005Typewriters or selective printing mechanisms characterised by the printing or marking process for which they are designed characterised by bringing liquid or particles selectively into contact with a printing material
    • B41J2/01Ink jet
    • B41J2/07Ink jet characterised by jet control
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N1/00Scanning, transmission or reproduction of documents or the like, e.g. facsimile transmission; Details thereof
    • H04N1/387Composing, repositioning or otherwise geometrically modifying originals
    • H04N1/3871Composing, repositioning or otherwise geometrically modifying originals the composed originals being of different kinds, e.g. low- and high-resolution originals
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06KGRAPHICAL DATA READING; PRESENTATION OF DATA; RECORD CARRIERS; HANDLING RECORD CARRIERS
    • G06K15/00Arrangements for producing a permanent visual presentation of the output data, e.g. computer output printers
    • G06K15/02Arrangements for producing a permanent visual presentation of the output data, e.g. computer output printers using printers
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06KGRAPHICAL DATA READING; PRESENTATION OF DATA; RECORD CARRIERS; HANDLING RECORD CARRIERS
    • G06K15/00Arrangements for producing a permanent visual presentation of the output data, e.g. computer output printers
    • G06K15/02Arrangements for producing a permanent visual presentation of the output data, e.g. computer output printers using printers
    • G06K15/18Conditioning data for presenting it to the physical printing elements
    • G06K15/1801Input data handling means
    • G06K15/181Receiving print data characterized by its formatting, e.g. particular page description languages
    • G06K15/1815Receiving print data in mixed format
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06KGRAPHICAL DATA READING; PRESENTATION OF DATA; RECORD CARRIERS; HANDLING RECORD CARRIERS
    • G06K15/00Arrangements for producing a permanent visual presentation of the output data, e.g. computer output printers
    • G06K15/02Arrangements for producing a permanent visual presentation of the output data, e.g. computer output printers using printers
    • G06K15/18Conditioning data for presenting it to the physical printing elements
    • G06K15/1848Generation of the printable image
    • G06K15/1852Generation of the printable image involving combining data of different types
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06KGRAPHICAL DATA READING; PRESENTATION OF DATA; RECORD CARRIERS; HANDLING RECORD CARRIERS
    • G06K15/00Arrangements for producing a permanent visual presentation of the output data, e.g. computer output printers
    • G06K15/02Arrangements for producing a permanent visual presentation of the output data, e.g. computer output printers using printers
    • G06K15/18Conditioning data for presenting it to the physical printing elements
    • G06K15/1848Generation of the printable image
    • G06K15/1856Generation of the printable image characterized by its workflow

Definitions

  • TECHNICAL FIELD This invention concerns a printer driver for a high performance color printer, such as a printer using a page-width drop-on-demand inkjet printhead. In another aspect it concerns a method of printing.
  • the present invention relates to a modular printhead for a color printer.
  • the invention concerns methods of printing and loading using the printhead.
  • the present invention relates to a modular printhead for a color printer.
  • the invention concerns methods of printing and loading using the printhead.
  • This invention concerns high performance color printers which typically use page-width drop-on-demand inkjet printheads.
  • a halftoner/compositor unit for digitally halftoning a contone color layer to bi-level. and compositing a black layer over the halftoned contone layer.
  • a method of halftoning and compositing concerns a dither unit for halftoning a contone color image in the form of an array of contone color pixel values, to bi-level dots.
  • the invention concerns a method of operating the dither unit.
  • This invention concerns pre-heat cycle for a printhead.
  • the invention has utility, for instance, in a high-performance color printer using drop-on- demand inkjet printheads.
  • This invention concerns a resource held in computer memory and multiple parallel processors which require simultaneous access to the resource.
  • the resource may be a dither matrix or dither volume used for digitally halftoning a contone color image, in the form of an array of contone color pixel values, to bi-level dots, and this may be required to be accessed by different thresholding units in parallel.
  • the invention is a method of accessing such a resource.
  • This invention concerns a printer system and method for predicting when an ink reservoir for a printer will run out of ink.
  • the printer may, for instance, use drop-on-demand inkjet printheads.
  • This invention concerns the control of firing pulse duration in a printhead. for a printer, such as a high performance color printer.
  • the invention in particular concerns a control system and a method.
  • the printer may use. for instance, a pagewidth drop-on-demand inkjet printhead.
  • a general 256-level dither volume provides great flexibility in dither cell design, by decoupling different intensity levels. It provides an extra degree of freedom over a dither matrix when designing an optimal stochastic dither [12] .
  • General dither volumes can be large - a 64x64x256 dither volume, for example, has a size of 128KB. They can also be inefficient to access since each color component can require the retrieval of a different bit from the volume.
  • the size of a printed dot varies according to the ink temperature.
  • energy is used to eject a drop of ink. the ink temperature rises.
  • a drop of ink is actually ejected, it carries some of the ink temperature away with it. Over the course of ejecting multiple drops, an equilibrium temperature is reached. The printing process has a strong tendency to stay at the equilibrium temperature once it is reached.
  • the invention is a printer equipped with a printhead controller for a printhead of the type including a temperature sensor to produce a signal indicative of the temperature of the printhead, and a plurality of nozzles each of which has an ink supply port to receive ink from a reservoir, an ink deposition port to eject ink dots, and a firing control port to receive signals to cause deposition of an ink dot from the deposition port during a firing cycle of the printhead.
  • the printhead controller includes means to receive the signal indicative of the temperature of the printhead from the temperature sensor, and means to supply a firing signal to the firing control ports of the nozzles, and the printhead controller is operable, before each print job, to set all the nozzles to fire, and to execute a series of modified firing cycles to provide a series of short firing pulses to each nozzle, the duration of each pulse being insufficient to fire the drops, but enough to heat up the ink, until the signal indicative of the temperature of the printhead indicates that it has reached its operating equilibrium temperature.
  • Tsense defined below
  • Tsense continues until a temperature about 30° C above ambient is reached. It is important to have temperature information fed back about when the equilibrium temperature is reached, since the time or temperature may vary depending on the ink composition.
  • the duration of the Preheat mode may be around 50 milliseconds, and depends on the ink composition.
  • Preheat does not affect performance as it is done while the data is being transferred to the printer.
  • the Preheat cycle involves a single Load Cycle to all nozzles with Is (i.e. setting all nozzles to fire), and a number of short firing pulses to each nozzle.
  • the duration of the pulse must be insufficient to fire the drops, but enough to heat up the ink.
  • the duration of the pulse may vary for each of the inks used in the printer. Altogether about 200 pulses for each nozzle are required, cycling through in the same sequence as a standard Print Cycle.
  • a particular example of a resource held in computer memory is a dither matrix or dither volume used for digitally halftoning a contone color image.
  • a set thresholding units handling the dithering of individual color components may require simultaneous access to a different dither cell locations.
  • the duration of firing pulses to a printhead depend on the viscosity of the ink. which is dependant on temperature and ink characteristics and the amount of power available to the printhead.
  • a typical pulse duration range is
  • the invention is a printer driver for a high performance printer, where the printer driver manages a two layer page buffer representing a page to be printed.
  • the first layer of the buffer contains background contone data, while the second layer contains foreground bi-level data.
  • the printer driver transmits the buffer to the printer on completion of the page, and the printer composits the two layers after halftoning the contone layer.
  • the printer driver operates such that when it determines that contone data being composited with the contone layer obscures data in the bi-level layer, the obscured bi-level data is removed from the bi-level layer and either discarded, or in the case where there is some interaction between the image represented by the obscuring contone data and the image represented by the obscured bi-level data then the obscured bi-level data is composited with the contone layer before the obscuring contone data is composited with the contone layer.
  • the contone data may have a lower resolution than the bi-level data.
  • the two layer page buffer may be augmented with a third layer of contone data, where the third layer contains a contone version of the bi-level data of the second layer subsampled at the resolution of the first layer, and where the printer driver operates such that when it determines that contone data being composited with the first layer obscures contone data in the third layer, the obscured contone data is removed from the third layer and is composited with the contone layer before the obscuring contone data is composited with the contone layer, and the bi-level data in the second layer which corresponds to the obscured contone data in the third layer is removed from the second layer
  • Interaction will typically occur between an image represented by the obscuring contone data and obscured bi-level data where the contone data represents a non-opaque image object.
  • the contone data will typically be color data, whereas the bi-level data will usually be black data; although it might be another color. Additional layers may be provided to accommodate additional foreground bi-level layers of additional colors.
  • the printer driver will usually be closely coupled with a host graphics system, so that the printer driver can provide device-specific handling for different graphics and imaging operations, in particular compositing operations and text operations.
  • the host will provide support for color management, so that device- independent color can be converted to printer-specific color in a standard way.
  • the page description sent to the printer generally contains device- specific color.
  • the host graphics system renders images and graphics to a nominal resolution specified by the printer driver, but it allows the printer driver to take control of rendering text.
  • the graphics system provides sufficient information to the printer driver to allow it to render and position text at a higher resolution than the nominal device resolution.
  • the host graphics system requires random access to a contone page buffer at the nominal device resolution, into which it composites graphics and imaging objects, but that it allows the printer driver to take control of the actual compositing in that it expects the printer driver to manage the page buffer.
  • the printer ' s page description may contains a 267 ppi contone layer and an 800 dpi black layer.
  • the printer driver may specify a nominal page resolution of 267 ppi to the graphics system. Where possible the printer driver relies on the graphics system to render image and graphics objects to the pixel level at 267 ppi, with the exception of black text.
  • the printer driver fields all text rendering requests, detects and renders black text at 800 dpi, but returns non-black text rendering requests to the graphics system for rendering at 267 ppi.
  • the printer driver When a black object is composited with the page buffer it is composited with the bi-level black layer. The black layer is updated by simply oring the object opacity with the black layer opacity, and the corresponding part of the medium-resolution contone black layer is recomputed from the high-resolution black layer. When a contone color object is composited with the page buffer it is composited with the contone layer. The contone layer and the black layer are updated as follows:
  • the contone object obscures the black layer, even if not fully opaquely, the affected black layer pixels are pushed from the black layer to the contone layer, i.e. composited with the contone layer and removed from the black layer. The contone object is then composited with the contone layer.
  • the bi-level black layer data may be transmitted to the printer in compressed form.
  • Group 4 facsimile coding may be used for this purpose, but it is better if the modified Huffman coding of horizontal run lengths is removed, or tuned for higher resolutions.
  • EDRL compression may be used.
  • the contone layer data may also be transmitted to the printer in compressed form. JPEG or wavelet compression may be used for this purpose.
  • the invention is a method of operating a printer driver for a high performance printer, where the printer driver manages a two layer page buffer; the first layer is for contone data, the second layer is for bi- level data where the bi-level data will be composited with the contone data by the printer: the method comprising the steps of: determining when contone data being composited with the contone layer obscures data in the bi-level layer, removing obscured bi-level data from the bi-level layer, and either discarding it.
  • the invention is a modular printhead for a color printer, including a plurality of nozzles each of which has an ink supply port, an ink deposition port and a firing control port to receive signals to cause deposition of an ink dot from the deposition port (firing) during a firing cycle of the printhead.
  • the nozzles of the printhead are arranged in groups, or pods, with the ink supply ports of the nozzles of each pod connected to a common ink supply line.
  • the nozzles of each pod are arranged in rows (the rows extend in the direction across the page to be printed), and the rows of nozzles are offset from each other so that the nozzles of each row deposit dots onto different lines if fired simultaneously.
  • Pods of each different color are arranged together into operating groups in which selected mutually exclusive sub-groups of nozzles have their firing control ports gated to enable them to be fired simultaneously at predetermined phases of a firing cycle.
  • the amount of offset between the rows of nozzles is designed to match the flow of paper under the nozzles.
  • the nozzles of each pod may be fired in order, along a first row starting from a first side, and then along the other row in the same direction ending at the other side.
  • a single pod may consist of ten nozzles sharing a common ink reservoir. Five nozzles are in one row, and five are in another. Each nozzle may produce dots 22.5mm in diameter spaced on a 15.875mm grid.
  • One pod of each different color may be grouped together to form a chromapod in which the pods of different colors are arranged so that the dots printed by the nozzles of one color will be for different lines than those printed by the other colors at the same time, but that each pod of the chromapod will print the same group of dots in turn.
  • One pod of cyan, magenta, yellow and black, may be grouped into a chromapod.
  • a chromapod represents different color components of the same horizontal set of ten dots on different lines.
  • the exact distance between different color pods is a constant number of dot-widths, and must therefore be taken into account when printing: The printing algorithm must allow for a variable distance of dot- widths between colors.
  • One or more chromapod ' s may be formed into phasegroup in which groups of nozzles in enabled podgroups are fired simultaneously during a given firing phase. One or more of the podgroups of a phasegroup are enabled at the same time, depending of the speed of printing required.
  • each chromapod may contain 40 nozzles, each podgroup may contain 200 nozzles: 50 cyan. 50 magenta. 50 yellow, and 50 black nozzles.
  • Two podgroups may be organised into a single phasegroup.
  • the phasegroup is so named because groups of nozzles within a phasegroup are fired simultaneously during a given firing phase.
  • the formation of a phasegroup from two podgroups allows both low-speed and high-speed printing via two PodgroupEnable lines.
  • Two phasegroups may be organised into a single firegroup, with four firegroups in each segment. Firegroups are so named because they all fire the same nozzles simultaneously. Two enable lines allow the firing of the Phasegroups' nozzles independently as different firing phases.
  • a 4-inch printhead will typically be made up of eight segments side by side, and each segment will have four firegroups.
  • a wider printhead may be made by assembling two of the printheads together. So an 8-inch printhead consists of two 4-inch printheads for a total of 51.200 nozzles.
  • the nozzle hierarchy allow overlapping phases and multiple speeds while maintaining even power consumption.
  • the nozzle groupings pods provide physical stability.
  • the nozzle groupings enable a low- speed and a high-speed printing mode to allow speed/power consumption trade-offs to be made in different product configurations.
  • a single 4-inch printhead may contain a total of 25,600 nozzles.
  • a Print Cycle involves the firing of up to all of these nozzles, dependent on the information to be printed. To fire them all at once would consume too much power and be problematic in terms of ink refill and nozzle interference. Further, the firing of a nozzle also causes acoustic perturbations for a limited time within the common ink reservoir of that nozzle's pod. The perturbations can interfere with the firing of another nozzle within the same pod. Consequently, the firing of nozzles within a pod should be offset from each other as long as possible. To address this, one nozzle per color may be fired from a chromapod and then a nozzle from the next chromapod within the podgroup may be fired.
  • Two firing modes may be defined: a low-speed printing mode and a high-speed printing mode: During low-speed printing, only one Podgroup of each phasegroup is given firing pulse, so only one podgroup of the two fires nozzles. In the low- speed printing mode the chromapods within both podgroups must all fire before the first chromapod fires again.
  • 128 nozzles may be fired simultaneously from each 4-inch printhead.
  • the fired nozzles should be maximally distant, so 16 nozzles are fired from each of the eight segments. To fire all 25.600 nozzles. 200 different sets of 128 nozzles must be fired.
  • both Podgroups are set, so both podgroups fire nozzles.
  • the chromapods within a single podgroups must all fire before the first chromapod fires again.
  • 256 nozzles may be fired simultaneously from each 4-inch printhead.
  • the fired nozzles should be maximally distant, so 32 nozzles are fired from each segment.
  • the power consumption in the low-speed mode is half that of the high-speed mode. Note, however, that the energy consumed to print a page is the same in both cases.
  • the printhead produces several lines of feedback to adjust the timing of the firing pulses.
  • One feedback signal informs the controller how hot the printhead is. This allows the controller to adjust timing of firing pulses, since temperature affects the viscosity of the ink.
  • a second feedback signal informs the controller how much voltage is available to the actuator.
  • a third feedback signal informs the controller of the resistivity (Ohms per square) of the actuator heater. This allows the controller to adjust the pulse widths to maintain a constant energy irrespective of the heater resistivity.
  • a fourth feedback signal informs the controller of the width of the critical part of the heater, which may vary up to ⁇ 5% due to lithographic and etching variations. This allows the controller to adjust the pulse width appropriately.
  • a Load Cycle involves the loading up of the printhead with the information to be printed during the subsequent Print Cycle.
  • the firing control port of each nozzle may have an associated NozzleEnable bit that determines whether or not the nozzle will fire during a Print Cycle.
  • the NozzleEnable bits are loaded during the load cycle via a set of shift registers. Once all the shift registers have been fully loaded, all of the bits are transferred in parallel to the appropriate NozzleEnable bits. Once the transfer has taken place, the Print Cycle can begin.
  • the Print Cycle and the Load Cycle can occur simultaneously as long as the parallel load of all NozzleEnable bits occurs at the end of the Print Cycle.
  • a first Clock pulse may transfer the CMYK bits for the next Print Cycle's dot 0, 800, 1600. 2400. 3200. 4000. 4800. and 5600.
  • the second Clock pulse may transfer the CMYK bits for the next Print Cycle's dot 1, 801, 1601. 2401, 3201. 4001; 4801 and 5601.
  • the Transfer pulse can be given.
  • the shift registers must be loaded according to the correspondence with the final transfer to the NozzleEnable bits, and here a number of different wiring possibilities exist.
  • One loading (and hence wiring) possibility is to load the bits in pod order, and within each pod the bits representing each nozzle from one side of the pod to the other (effectively loading the first nozzle from the first row through to the last row before moving on to the second nozzle in the first row). In a 2 row pod this means loading the nozzles in an apparant zig-zag fashion.
  • Another possibility is to load the bits in pod order, and within each pod the bits representing each row. and within each row starting from the nozzle from one side of the pod to the other.
  • CMYK outputs although printed during the same Print Cycle, do not appear on the same physical output line.
  • the physical separation of odd and even nozzles within the printhead, as well as separation between nozzles of different colors ensures that they will produce dots on different lines of the page. This relative difference must be accounted for when loading the data into the printhead.
  • the actual difference in lines depends on the characteristics of the inkjet mechanism used in the printhead. The differences can be defined by variables representing the distance between nozzles of different colors, and the distance between nozzles of the same color.
  • the invention is a modular printhead for a color printer, including a plurality of nozzles each of which has an ink supply port, an ink deposition port and a firing control port to receive signals to cause deposition of an ink dot from the deposition port (firing) during a firing cycle of the printhead.
  • the nozzles of the printhead are arranged in groups, or pods, with the ink supply ports of the nozzles of each pod connected to a common ink supply line.
  • the nozzles of each pod are arranged in rows (the rows extend in the direction across the page to be printed), and the rows of nozzles are offset from each other so that the nozzles of each row deposit dots onto different lines if fired simultaneously.
  • Pods of each different color are arranged together into operating groups in which selected mutually exclusive subgroups of nozzles have their firing control ports gated to enable them to be fired simultaneously at predetermined phases of a firing cycle. In one example there are two rows of nozzles in each pod and the nozzles of one row deposit the even dots along one line on the page, and the nozzles of the other row deposit the odd dots along the adjacent line on the page.
  • the amount of offset between the rows of nozzles is designed to match the flow of paper under the nozzles.
  • the nozzles of each pod may be fired in order, along a first row starting from a first side, and then along the other row in the same direction ending at the other side.
  • a single pod may consist of ten nozzles sharing a common ink reservoir. Five nozzles are in one row, and five are in another. Each nozzle may produce dots 22.5mm in diameter spaced on a 15.875mm grid.
  • One pod of each different color may be grouped together to form a chromapod in which the pods of different colors are arranged so that the dots printed by the nozzles of one color will be for different lines than those printed by the other colors at the same time, but that each pod of the chromapod will print the same group of dots in turn.
  • One pod of cyan, magenta, yellow and black, may be grouped into a chromapod.
  • a chromapod represents different color components of the same horizontal set of ten dots on different lines.
  • the exact distance between different color pods is a constant number of dot-widths, and must therefore be taken into account when printing: The printing algorithm must allow for a variable distance of dot- widths between colors.
  • One or more chromapods may be formed into phasegroup in which groups of nozzles in enabled podgroups are fired simultaneously during a given firing phase.
  • One or more of the podgroups of a phasegroup are enabled at the same time, depending of the speed of printing required.
  • each chromapod may contain 40 nozzles, each podgroup may contain 200 nozzles: 50 cyan. 50 magenta, 50 yellow, and 50 black nozzles.
  • Two podgroups may be organised into a single phasegroup.
  • the phasegroup is so named because groups of nozzles within a phasegroup are fired simultaneously during a given firing phase.
  • the formation of a phasegroup from two podgroups allows both low-speed and high-speed printing via two PodgroupEnable lines.
  • Two phasegroups may be organised into a single firegroup, with four firegroups in each segment. Firegroups are so named because they all fire the same nozzles simultaneously. Two enable lines allow the firing of the Phasegroups' nozzles independently as different firing phases.
  • a 4-inch printhead will typically be made up of eight segments side by side, and each segment will have four firegroups.
  • a wider printhead may be made by assembling two of the printheads together. So an 8-inch printhead consists of two 4-inch printheads for a total of 51.200 nozzles.
  • the nozzle hierarchy allow overlapping phases and multiple speeds while maintaining even power consumption.
  • the nozzle groupings pods provide physical stability.
  • the nozzle groupings enable a low- speed and a high-speed printing mode to allow speed/power consumption trade-offs to be made in different product configurations.
  • a single 4-inch printhead may contain a total of 25,600 nozzles.
  • a Print Cycle involves the firing of up to all of these nozzles, dependent on the information to be printed. To fire them all at once would consume too much power and be problematic in terms of ink refill and nozzle interference. Further, the firing of a nozzle also causes acoustic perturbations for a limited time within the common ink reservoir of that nozzle's pod. The perturbations can interfere with the firing of another nozzle within the same pod. Consequently, the firing of nozzles within a pod should be offset from each other as long as possible. To address this, one nozzle per color may be fired from a chromapod and then a nozzle from the next chromapod within the podgroup may be fired.
  • Two firing modes may be defined: a low-speed printing mode and a high-speed printing mode: During low-speed printing, only one Podgroup of each phasegroup is given firing pulse, so only one podgroup of the two fires nozzles. In the low- speed printing mode the chromapods within both podgroups must all fire before the first chromapod fires again.
  • 128 nozzles may be fired simultaneously from each 4-inch printhead.
  • the fired nozzles should be maximally distant, so 16 nozzles are fired from each of the eight segments.
  • both Podgroups are set. so both podgroups fire nozzles.
  • the chromapods within a single podgroups must all fire before the first chromapod fires again.
  • 256 nozzles may be fired simultaneously from each 4-inch printhead.
  • the fired nozzles should be maximally distant, so 32 nozzles are fired from each segment.
  • the power consumption in the low-speed mode is half that of the high-speed mode. Note, however, that the energy consumed to print a page is the same in both cases.
  • the printhead produces several lines of feedback to adjust the timing of the firing pulses.
  • One feedback signal informs the controller how hot the printhead is. This allows the controller to adjust timing of firing pulses, since temperature affects the viscosity of the ink.
  • a second feedback signal informs the controller how much voltage is available to the actuator.
  • a third feedback signal informs the controller of the resistivity (Ohms per square) of the actuator heater. This allows the controller to adjust the pulse widths to maintain a constant energy irrespective of the heater resistivity.
  • a fourth feedback signal informs the controller of the width of the critical part of the heater, which may vary up to ⁇ 5% due to lithographic and etching variations. This allows the controller to adjust the pulse width appropriately.
  • a Load Cycle involves the loading up of the printhead with the information to be printed during the subsequent Print Cycle.
  • the firing control port of each nozzle may have an associated NozzleEnable bit that determines whether or not the nozzle will fire during a Print Cycle.
  • the NozzleEnable bits are loaded during the load cycle via a set of shift registers. Once all the shift registers have been fully loaded, all of the bits are transferred in parallel to the appropriate NozzleEnable bits. Once the transfer has taken place, the Print Cycle can begin.
  • the Print Cycle and the Load Cycle can occur simultaneously as long as the parallel load of all NozzleEnable bits occurs at the end of the Print Cycle.
  • a first Clock pulse may transfer the CMYK bits for the next Print Cycle's dot 0. 800. 1600, 2400. 3200, 4000, 4800, and 5600.
  • the second Clock pulse may transfer the CMYK bits for the next Print Cycle's dot 1. 801. 1601, 2401, 3201. 400i; 4801 and 5601.
  • the Transfer pulse can be given.
  • the shift registers must be loaded according to the correspondence with the final transfer to the NozzleEnable bits, and here a number of different wiring possibilities exist.
  • One loading (and hence wiring) possibility is to load the bits in pod order, and within each pod the bits representing each nozzle from one side of the pod to the other (effectively loading the first nozzle from the first row through to the last row before moving on to the second nozzle in the first row). In a 2 row pod this means loading the nozzles in an apparant zig-zag fashion.
  • Another possibility is to load the bits in pod order, and within each pod the bits representing each row. and within each row starting from the nozzle from one side of the pod to the other.
  • CMYK outputs although printed during the same Print Cycle, do not appear on the same physical output line.
  • the physical separation of odd and even nozzles within the printhead, as well as separation between nozzles of different colors ensures that they will produce dots on different lines of the page. This relative difference must be accounted for when loading the data into the printhead.
  • the actual difference in lines depends on the characteristics of the inkjet mechanism used in the printhead. The differences can be defined by variables representing the distance between nozzles of different colors, and the distance between nozzles of the same color.
  • the invention is a halftoner/compositor unit for halftoning a contone color layer to bi-level. and compositing a black layer over the halftoned contone layer, comprising: An input port to receive an expanded contone color layer in the form of a series of contone color pixel values, and an expanded black layer in the form of a series of black dot values.
  • a dither unit to dither each contone color pixel value received at the input port and determine the value of a bi-level output dot for each color component.
  • a composite unit to receive the values of the bi-level output dots from the dither unit and the black dot values from the input port, and to composite the black layer over the halftoned layer, for instance, such that when the value of a black dot represents full opacity, then the values of the halftoned dots for each color are set to represent no color.
  • a clock enable generator to generate enable signals for clocking the contone color pixel input, the black dot input, and the dot output.
  • the output may be a set of 1600 dpi bi-level image lines.
  • the color contone layer may be a CMYK contone layer.
  • An input contone CMYK FIFO may include a full 8KB line buffer. Each line is read once and then used contone scale factor times to effect vertical up-scaling via line replication. FIFO write address wrapping is disabled until the start of the final replicated use of the line, at which time the clock enable generator generates a contone line advance enable signal which enables wrapping.
  • the consumer of the data produced by the unit is typically a printhead interface.
  • the printhead interface may not only require bi-level image data in planar format, i.e. with the color planes separated. But, it may also require that even and odd pixels are separated.
  • the output stage of the unit may use 8 parallel pixel
  • FIFOs one each for even cyan, odd cyan, even magenta, odd magenta, even yellow, odd yellow, even black, and odd black.
  • the clock enable generator may also generate an even signal which is used to select the even or odd set of output dot FIFOs. Once started, the unit may proceed until it detects an end-of-page condition, or until it is explicitly stopped via its control register.
  • the unit generates a page of dots of a specified width and length and a number of registers may be employed to provide data to control the page structure and parameters.
  • a page width register to receive page width data which may correspond to the width of the printhead.
  • a page length register to receive page length data which may correspond to the length of the target page.
  • a left margin register to receive data describing the position of the left margin.
  • a right margin register to receive data describing the position of the right margin.
  • the distance from the left margin to the right margin corresponds to the target page width.
  • the halftoner/compositor unit generates target page data between specified left and right margins relative to the page width.
  • a black page width register to receive data describing the black page width.
  • a contone page width register to receive data describing the contone page width.
  • the halftoner/compositor unit consumes black and contone data according to specified black and contone page widths.
  • the halftoner/compositor unit clips black and contone data to the target page width. This allows the black and contone page widths to exceed the target page width without requiring any special end-of-line logic at the input FIFO level.
  • the clock enable generator may also generate a. margin signal which is used to generate white dots when the current dot position is in the left or right margin of the page.
  • the halftoner/compositor unit scales contone data to printer resolution both horizontally and vertically based on a specified scale factor.
  • a contone scale factor register may be provided to receive a contone scale factor. This scale factor must be written to the contone scale factor register prior to starting the halftoner/compositor unit.
  • the halftoner/compositor control and configuration registers may be summarised according to the following table:
  • each dot column of the volume can be implemented as 256 separate bits.
  • each dot column of the volume can be implemented as a fixed set of thresholds. Using three 8-bit thresholds, for example, only consumes 24 bits. Now. n thresholds define 2 + 1 intensitv intervals, within which the corresponding dither cell location is alternately not set or set. The contone pixel value being dithered uniquely selects one of the n + 1 intervals, and this determines the value of the corresponding output dot.
  • the contone data may be dithered using a triple-threshold 64x64x 3x8-bit (12KB) dither volume.
  • the three thresholds form a convenient 24-bit value which can be retrieved from the dither cell ROM in one cycle.
  • the same triple-threshold value can be retrieved once and used to dither each color component.
  • the dither cell can be split into four subcells and stored in four separately addressable ROMs from which four different triple-threshold values can be retrieved in parallel in one cycle.
  • Four color planes share the same dither cell at vertical and/or horizontal offsets of 32 dots from each other.
  • a multi-threshold dither unit may be used.
  • a triple- threshold unit converts a triple-threshold value and an intensity value into an interval and thence a one or zero bit.
  • the triple-thresholding rules are shown in the following Table.
  • the composite unit composites a black layer dot over a halftoned CMYK layer dot. If the black layer opacity is one, then the halftoned CMY is set to zero. Given a 4-bit halftoned color C c M c Y c K,. and a 1-bit black layer opacity K , the composite logic is as defined in the following Table:
  • the clock enable generator uses a set of counters.
  • the internal logic of the counters is defined in the following Table:
  • the invention is a dither unit for digitally halftoning a contone color image, in the form of an array of contone color pixel values, to bi-level dots.
  • the dither unit comprises a dither volume which contains, for each dither cell location, a fixed set of n thresholds which define n + 1 intensity intervals within which the dither cell location is defined to be alternately not set and set.
  • a dither unit may operate to dither each contone color pixel value received at the input port by determining the value of a bi-level output dot for each color component by looking up the dither volume.
  • a set of thresholds can be used to effectively runlength-encode a bit column of a dither volume, i.e. to compress a bit column. This relies on the fact that there is typically coherence between adjacent bits in the column.
  • a multi-threshold unit may be provided for each color component of the image. All the multi-threshold units are operatively coupled to the dither volume, and each multi-threshold unit determines the value of an output dot corresponding to a contone color pixel component value by determining whether the dither cell location corresponding to the location of the output dot is defined to be set within the intensity interval which the contone value uniquely selects.
  • Three thresholds may be used, and they may be 8-bit thresholds.
  • a multi- threshold value may be retrieved once and used to dither each color component.
  • the dither cell may be split into subcells and stored in separately addressable memories from which different multi-threshold values can be retrieved in parallel.
  • four separate triple-threshold units may each receive a series of contone color pixel values for respective color components, and a dither cell address generator may operate in conjunction with four four- way multiplexors, for respective triple-threshold units, to control the retrieval of four different triple-threshold values from subcells of the dither unit.
  • the triple-threshold units may convert triple-threshold values T 1( T 2 and T 3 and an intensity value V into an interval and thence a one or zero bit according to the rules shown in the following Table:
  • the invention is, in a dither unit for digitally halftoning an contone color image, in the form of an array of contone color pixel values, to bi-level dots, where said dither unit comprises a dither volume, a halftoning method comprising the following steps: representing each dither cell location of said dither volume by a fixed set of n thresholds which define n + 1 intensity intervals within which said dither cell location is defined to be alternately not set and set; and using the value of the contone pixel component being dithered to uniquely select one of said n + 1 intensity intervals, to determine the value of the output dot corresponding to said contone pixel component value.
  • the dither unit further comprises, for each color component of the image, a multi-threshold unit, all of which multi-threshold units being operatively coupled to the dither volume; and the method further comprises the following step: determining in each said multi-threshold unit the value of an output dot corresponding to a contone color pixel component value by determining whether the dither cell location corresponding to the location of said output dot is defined to be set within the intensity interval which said contone value uniquely selects.
  • the invention is a printer equipped with a printhead controller for a printhead of the type including a temperature sensor to produce a signal indicative of the temperature of the printhead, and a plurality of nozzles each of which has an ink supply port to receive ink from a reservoir, an ink deposition port to eject ink dots, and a firing control port to receive signals to cause deposition of an ink dot from the deposition port during a firing cycle of the printhead.
  • the printhead controller includes means to receive the signal indicative of the temperature of the printhead from the temperature sensor, and means to supply a firing signal to the firing control ports of the nozzles, and the printhead controller is operable, before each print job, to set all the nozzles to fire, and to execute a series of modified firing cycles to provide a series of short firing pulses to each nozzle, the duration of each pulse being insufficient to fire the drops, but enough to heat up the ink. until the signal indicative of the temperature of the printhead indicates that it has reached its operating equilibrium temperature. Feedback during the Preheat mode may be provided by Tsense (defined below), and continues until a temperature about 30° C above ambient is reached. It is important to have temperature information fed back about when the equilibrium temperature is reached, since the time or temperature may vary depending on the ink composition.
  • the duration of the Preheat mode may be around 50 milliseconds, and depends on the ink composition.
  • Preheat does not affect performance as it is done while the data is being transferred to the printer.
  • the Preheat cycle involves a single Load Cycle to all nozzles with Is (i.e. setting all nozzles to fire), and a number of short firing pulses to each nozzle.
  • the duration of the pulse must be insufficient to fire the drops, but enough to heat up the ink.
  • the duration of the pulse may vary for each of the inks used in the printer. Altogether about 200 pulses for each nozzle are required, cycling through in the same sequence as a standard Print Cycle.
  • the invention is a resource held in computer memory, multiple parallel processors which require simultaneous access to the resource and a resource address generator to generate coordinates within the resource, where the resource is divided into different parts with each part being stored in different memory banks, and the resource address generator generates coordinates which are used to select the parts of the resource that are used by each processor, the selection being arranged to ensure that each part is only used by one processor at a time. The selection may also ensure that each processor uses the parts in the order in which they appear in the resource.
  • the resource may be a multi-threshold dither matrix for digitally halftoning a contone color image, in the form of an array of contone color pixel values, to bi-level dots.
  • Said dither matrix may comprise, for each dither cell location, a fixed set of n thresholds defining n + 1 intensity intervals within which the dither cell location is defined to be alternately not set and set.
  • the multiple parallel processors which require simultaneous access to the resource may be multi-threshold units provided for each color component of the image. All the multi-threshold units are operatively coupled to the multi-threshold dither matrix, and each multi-threshold unit determines the value of an output dot corresponding to a contone color pixel component value by determining whether the dither cell location corresponding to the location of said output dot is defined to be set within the intensity interval which the contone value uniquely selects.
  • Such a dither unit may operate to dither each contone color pixel value received at the input port by determining the value of a bi-level output dot for each color component by looking up the multi-threshold dither matrix.
  • the dither cell may be split into subcells and stored in separately addressable memories from which different multi-threshold values are retrieved in parallel.
  • four separate triple-threshold units may each receive a series of contone color pixel values for respective color components, and a dither cell address generator operates in conjunction with four four-way multiplexors, for respective threshold units, to control the retrieval of four different triple threshold values from four different subcells of the dither matrix.
  • the address generator is easily able to be arranged so that no two threshold units require simultaneous access to the same subcell, if dither cell registration between color panes is not desired.
  • the invention is a method of accessing resources held in computer memory, where multiple parallel processors require simultaneous access to the resource and there is a resource address generator to generate coordinates within the resource, the method comprising the steps of: dividing the resource into different parts: storing each part in a different memory bank: and operating the resource address generator to generates coordinates which are used to select the parts of the resource that are used by each processor, the selection being arranged to ensure that each part is only used by one processor at a time. The selection may also ensure that each processor uses the parts in the order in which they appear in the resource.
  • the resource may be a multi-threshold dither matrix for digitally halftoning a contone color image, in the form of an array of contone color pixel values, to bi-level dots.
  • Said dither matrix may comprise, for each dither cell location, a fixed set of n thresholds defining n + 1 intensity intervals within which the dither cell location is defined to be alternately not set and set.
  • the multiple parallel processors which require simultaneous access to the resource may be multi-threshold units provided for each color component of the image. All the multi-threshold units are operatively coupled to the multi-threshold dither matrix, and each multi-threshold unit determines the value of an output dot corresponding to a contone color pixel component value by determining whether the dither cell location corresponding to the location of the output dot is defined to be set within the intensity interval which said contone value uniquely selects.
  • the dither cell may be split into subcells and stored in separately addressable memories from which different multi-threshold values are retrieved in parallel.
  • four separate triple-threshold units may each receive a series of contone color pixel values for respective color components, and a dither cell address generator operates in conjunction with four four-way multiplexors, for respective threshold units, to control the retrieval of four different triple threshold values from four different subcells of the dither matrix.
  • the dither cell address generator may generate dither cell coordinates which reflect the current dot coordinates modulo the size of the dither cell.
  • the low-order bits of the dither cell coordinates may be used to address a location within each dither subcell, and the high-order bits of the dither cell coordinates may be used to select which dither subcell is used by each multi- threshold unit, the selection being arranged to ensure that each subcell is only used by one multi-threshold unit at a time, and to ensure that each multi-threshold unit uses the dither subcells in the order in which they appear in the dither cell.
  • the invention is a printer system for use in a printer having a printhead of the type including a plurality of nozzles each of which has an ink supply port, and ink deposition port and a firing control port to receive signals to cause deposition of an ink dot from the deposition port during a firing cycle of the printhead.
  • the printer also includes an ink reservoir (such as a cartridge) to supply ink to the ink supply ports of said nozzles, and said printer system operates to predict when said ink reservoir will run out of ink.
  • the printer system comprises, an input port to receive a signal indicative of the number of dots of ink printed by or to be printed by the printer, a memory in which is stored data representing the number of dots of ink remaining in said reservoir, and a processor to receive signals from said input port and to update said memory as printing takes place.
  • the signal indicative of the number of dots of ink printed by the printer is related to the signals received at the firing control ports of said nozzles.
  • an indication whether there is enough ink remaining in the reservoir to print another page may be generated.
  • a new page may not be printed unless there is enough ink left.
  • the signal indicative of the number of dots printed or to be printed may be derived from a controller for the printhead. the printhead itself, or the ink reservoir.
  • a dot counter may maintain a count of the number of dots of ink fired from the printhead. The dot count may be periodically cleared.
  • the dot counter may have an input port to receive a signal whenever a dot is printed, a bit counter with clock and clear input terminals, a positive feedback connection around the counter, and an output from the counter indicating the current count.
  • An encoder may be placed in the input line to the dot counter to convert the signal received.
  • the printer system may include an input port respective to each ink reservoir, to receive a signal indicative of the number of dots of ink from that reservoir printed by or to be printed by the printer, and the memory may store data representing the number of dots of ink remaining in each reservoir.
  • the invention is a method of operating the printer system to predict when said ink reservoir will run out of ink. comprising the following steps: receiving a signal indicative of the number of dots of ink printed by or to be printed by the printer; storing data representing the number of dots of ink remaining in the reservoir: and updating the memory as printing takes place: where, the signal indicative of the number of dots of ink printed by or to be printed by the printer is related to the signals received at the firing control ports of said nozzles.
  • An indication may be generated as to whether there is enough ink remaining in the reservoir to print another page, at the end of a predetermined number of pages. A new page may not be printed unless there is enough ink left.
  • the invention is a firing pulse duration control system for a printer, comprising: A first input port to receive a signal indicative of the voltage available.
  • a programmable pulse duration table indexed by signals received at the first input port, to generate control signals that represent predetermined durations for a firing pulse.
  • a second input port may be provided to receive a signal indicative of the temperature of the printhead in the printer.
  • the programmable pulse duration table is indexed by signals received from both first and second input ports to generate the control signals.
  • the table of pulse durations allows the use of a lower cost power supply, and aids in maintaining more accurate drop ejection.
  • the entries in the table may represent values in the range of 0-4ms and a control output is generated according to the entry indexed.
  • a pulse width generator will, in use, be placed downstream of the control system to receive its control output and generate the firing pulses for the printhead.
  • the table may be written before printing the first page of a print run.
  • the table may be updated in between pages of a print run, if desired.
  • Each entry in the table may include a weighting from one or more of the following features: • User brightness settings • Viscosity curve of ink
  • Tsense informs the controller how hot the printhead is. This allows the controller to adjust timing of firing pulses, since temperature affects the viscosity of the ink.
  • Vsense informs the controller how much voltage is available to the actuator. This allows the controller to compensate for a flat battery or high voltage source by adjusting the pulse width.
  • the Pulse Duration table may have 256 entries, and each entry may be
  • the signal indicative of voltage may come from Vsense. and the signal indicative of temperature may come from Tsense.
  • the signals received at the input ports may be converted for use to index the table.
  • An 8- bit entry to the table may be indexed by two 4-bit numbers, so the upper 4- bits may come from Vsense. and the lower 4-bits may come from Tsense.
  • the invention concerns a firing pulse duration control system for a printer, comprising: a first input port; a programmable pulse duration table; and an output port: a method of generating a firing pulse duration control signal, comprising the steps of: receiving a first signal indicative of the voltage available: indexing the programmable pulse duration table by the first signal to generate control signals that represent predetermined durations for a firing pulse: and transmitting the control signals.
  • Figure 1 is a table which illustrates the sustained printing rate achievable with double-buffering in the printer.
  • Figure 2 is a flowchart showing the conceptual data flow from application to printed page.
  • Figure 3 is a pictorial view of the iPrint printer in its closed configuration.
  • Figure 4 is a pictorial view of the iPrint printer in its open configuration.
  • Figure 5 is a cutaway diagram showing the paper path through the printer.
  • Figure 6 is a pictorial cutaway view of a Merrijet printhead cartridge and printhead capping mechanism.
  • Figure 7 is a sectional view of the Memjet printhead cartridge and printhead capping mechanism of Figure 6.
  • Figure 8 is a pictorial view of the printer controller.
  • Figure 9 is an example of coding a simple black and white image.
  • Figure 10 is a schematic diagram of a pod of ten printing nozzles numbered in firing order.
  • Figure 11 is a schematic diagram of the same pod of ten printing nozzles numbered in load order.
  • Figure 12 is a schematic diagram of a chromapod.
  • Figure 13 is a schematic diagram of a podgroup of five chromapods.
  • Figure 14 is a schematic diagram of a phasegroup of two podgroups.
  • Figure 15 is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between Segments, Firegroups. Phasegroups, Podgroups and Chromapods.
  • Figure 16 is a phase diagram of the AEnable and BEnable lines during a typical Print Cycle.
  • Figure 17 is a diagram of the Printer controller architecture.
  • Figure 18 is a flowchart summarising the page expansion and printing data flow.
  • Figure 19 is a block diagram of the EDRL expander unit.
  • Figure 20 is a block diagram of the EDRL stream decoder.
  • Figure 21 is a block diagram of the Runlength Decoder.
  • Figure 22 is a block diagram of the Runlength Encoder.
  • Figure 23 is a block diagram of the JPEG decoder.
  • Figure 24 is a block diagram of the Halftoner/Compositor unit.
  • Figure 25 is a series of page lines that show the relationships between page widths and margins.
  • Figure 26 is a block diagram of a Multi-threshold dither.
  • Figure 27 is a block diagram of the logic of the Triple-threshold unit.
  • Figure 28 is a block diagram of the internal structure of the Printhead Interface.
  • Figure 29 is a diagram of the conceptual overview of double buffering during print lines N and N+l.
  • Figure 30 is a block diagram of the structure of the LLFU.
  • Figure 31 is a diagram of the conceptual structure of a Buffer.
  • Figure 32 is a diagram of the logical structure of a Buffer.
  • Figure 33 is a block diagram of the generation of AEnable and BEnable Pulse Widths.
  • Figure 34 is a diagram of the Dot Count logic.
  • Figure 35 is a block diagram of the speaker interface.
  • Figure 36 is a diagram of a two-layer page buffer.
  • Figure 37 is a series of diagrams showing the compositing of a black object onto a white image.
  • Figure 38 is a series of diagrams showing the compositing of a contone object onto a white image.
  • Figure 39 is a series of diagrams showing the compositing of a black object onto an image containing a contone object.
  • Figure 40 is a series of diagrams showing the compositing of an opaque contone object onto an image containing a black object.
  • Figure 41 is a series of diagrams showing the compositing of a transparent contone object onto an image containing a black object.
  • Figure 42 is a block diagram of the Windows 9x/NT printing system with printer driver components.
  • the invention will be described with reference to a high-performance color printer which combines photographic-quality image reproduction with magazine-quality text reproduction.
  • the printer utilizes an 8" page-width drop-on-demand microelectromechanical inkjet (“Memjet”) printhead which produces 1600 dots per inch (dpi) bi-level CMYK (Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, blacK). It prints' 30 full-color A4 or Letter pages per minute, and is intended as an entry-level desktop printer.
  • the printer has been designated as iPrint and will be referred to by that name in the following description.
  • iPrint reproduces black text and graphics directly using bi-level black, and continuous-tone (contone) images and graphics using dithered bi-level CMYK.
  • iPrint supports a black resolution of 800 dpi. and a contone resolution of 267 pixels per inch (ppi).
  • iPrint is. in use. attached to a workstation or personal computer (PC) via a relatively low-speed (1.5MBytes/s) universal serial bus (USB) connection [14].
  • PC personal computer
  • USB universal serial bus
  • iPrint decompresses and prints the page line by line at the speed of the Memjet printhead.
  • iPrint contains sufficient buffer memory for two compressed pages (6MB), allowing it to print one page while receiving the next, but does not contain sufficient buffer memory for even a single uncompressed page (119MB).
  • the standard Memjet nozzle layout has a half-inch unit cell, and so can be trivially adapted to page widths which are multiples of half an inch. Arbitrary page widths can be achieved with custom nozzle layouts, in markets which justify such specialisation.
  • the initial Memjet building block is a widely useful four-inch printhead which makes efficient use of a six-inch silicon wafer.
  • the iPrint design therefore assumes an eight-inch Memjet printhead. made up of two four-inch printheads joined together. The use of a wider printhead to achieve full bleed on A4/Letter pages only affects a few aspects of the iPrint design - specifically the exact mechanical design, and the logic of the printhead interface.
  • a Memjet printhead produces 1600 dpi bi-level CMYK. On low- diffusion paper, each ejected drop forms an almost perfectly circular 22.5 micron diameter dot. Dots are easily produced in isolation, allowing dispersed-dot dithering to be exploited to its fullest. Since the Memjet printhead is page-width and operates with a constant paper velocity, the four color planes are printed in perfect registration, allowing ideal dot-on-dot printing. Since there is consequently no spatial interaction between color planes, the same dither matrix is used for each color plane.
  • a page layout may contain a mixture of images, graphics and text. Continuous-tone (contone) images and graphics are reproduced using a stochastic dispersed-dot dither. Unlike a clustered-dot (or amplitude- modulated) dither, a dispersed-dot (or frequency-modulated) dither reproduces high spatial frequencies (i.e. image detail) almost to the limits of the dot resolution, while simultaneously reproducing lower spatial frequencies to their full color depth.
  • a stochastic dither matrix is carefully designed to be free of objectionable low-frequency patterns when tiled across the image. As such its size typically exceeds the minimum size required to support a number of intensity levels (i.e. 16x 16 x 8 bits for 257 intensity levels).
  • iPrint uses a dither volume of size 64x 64x 3 x 8 bits.
  • the volume provides an extra degree of freedom during the design of the dither by allowing a dot to change states multiple times through the intensity range (rather than just once as in a conventional dither matrix).
  • Human contrast sensitivity peaks at a spatial frequency of about 3 cycles per degree of visual field and then falls off logarithmically, decreasing by a factor of 100 and becoming difficult to measure beyond about 40 cycles per degree [2]. At a normal viewing distance of between 400mm and 250mm, this translates roughly to 150-250 cycles per inch (cpi) on the printed page, or 300-500 samples per inch according to Nyquist's theorem.
  • USB Universal Serial Bus
  • PC personal computer
  • USB Universal Serial Bus
  • the printer Since the act of interrupting a Memjet-based printer during the printing of a page produces a visible discontinuity, it is advantageous for the printer to receive the entire page before commencing printing, to eliminate the possibility of buffer underrun. Since the printer can contain only limited buffer memory, i.e. two pages " worth or 6MB. then the
  • Figure 1 illustrates the sustained printing rate achievable with double- buffering in the printer.
  • the first stage 1 requires the first page to be rendered in the PC. and this takes up to two seconds.
  • the second stage 2 the next page is rendered and the first page is transferred to the printer, again this takes up to two seconds.
  • the third stage 3 the first page is printed, the second page is transferred and a third page is rendered, this takes two seconds.
  • Other desktop connection options provide similar bandwidth to USB. and so impose similar constraints on the architecture. These include the parallel port at 2MB/s. and lOBase-T Ethernet at around lMB/s.
  • 3.2 Page Rendering and Compression Page rendering can be split between the PC and printer in various ways.
  • Some printers support a full page description language (PDL) such as Postscript, and contain correspondingly sophisticated Tenderers.
  • PDL page description language
  • Other printers provide special support only for rendering text, to achieve high text resolution. This usually includes support for built-in or downloadable fonts.
  • the use of an embedded Tenderer reduces the rendering burden on the PC and reduces the amount of data transmitted from the PC to the printer. However, this comes at a price.
  • These printers are more complex than they might be, and are often unable to provide full support for the graphics system of the PC, through which application programs construct, render and print pages.
  • iPrint relies on the PC 4 to render pages, i.e. contone images and graphics to the pixel level, and black text and graphics to the dot level.
  • FIG. 5 contains only a simple rendering engine which dithers the contone data and combines the results with any foreground bi-level black text and graphics.
  • This strategy keeps the printer simple, and independent of any page description language or graphics system. It fully exploits the high performance of current PCs.
  • the downside of this strategy is the potentially large amount of data which must be transmitted from the PC to the printer. We consequently use compression to reduce this data to the 3MB/page required to allow a sustained printing rate of 30 pages/minute.
  • Figure 2 is a flowchart illustrating the conceptual data flow from an application 6 to a printed page 7.
  • An 8" by 11.7" A4 page has a bi-level CMYK pagesize of 114.3MBytes at 1600 dpi, and a contone CMYK pagesize of 32JMB at 300 ppi.
  • JPEG compression 9 In the printer driver 8, we use JPEG compression 9 to compress the contone data.
  • JPEG is inherently lossy, for compression ratios of
  • a full page of black text (and/or graphics) rasterized at printer resolution (1600 dpi) yields a bi-level image of 28.6MB. Since rasterizing text at 1600 dpi places a heavy burden on the PC for a small gain, we choose to rasterize text at a fully acceptable 800 dpi. This yields a bi-level image of 7.1MB. requiring a lossless compression ratio of less than 2.5:1 to fit within the 3MB/page limit. We achieve this with a two-dimensional compression scheme adapted from Group 4 Facsimile, all indicated generally at 10.
  • any combination of the two fits within the 3MB limit. If text lies on top of a background image, then the worst case is a compressed pagesize approaching 6MB (depending on the actual text compression ratio). This fits within the printer ' s page buffer memory, but prevents double-buffering of pages in the printer, thereby reducing the printer's page rate by two-thirds, i.e. to 10 pages/minute.
  • the PC renders contone images and graphics to the pixel level, and black text and graphics to the dot level. These are compressed 11 by different means and transmitted together to the printer.
  • the printer contains two 3MB page buffers - one 12 for the page being received from the PC. and one 13 for the page being printed.
  • the printer expands the compressed page as it is being printed. This expansion consists of decompressing the 267 ppi contone CMYK image data 14, halftoning the resulting contone pixels to 1600 dpi bi-level CMYK dots 15, decompressing the 800 dpi bi-level black text data 16. and compositing the resulting bi-level black text dots over the corresponding bi-level CMYK image dots 17.
  • FIG 3 is a pictorial view of the iPrint 21 when closed.
  • the cover 22 opens to form part of the paper tray, as shown in Figure 4.
  • a second part 23 is hinged within cover 22 and opens to extend the paper tray.
  • a paper exit tray 24 is slideably extendable from the front of the printer.
  • the front panel 25 revealed when cover 22 is opened, contains the user interface - the power button 26 and power indicator LED 27, the paper feed button 28, and the out-of-paper 29 and ink low 30 LEDs.
  • 4.1 Paper Path iPrint uses a standard paper transport mechanism.
  • the paper path 50 is illustrated in Figure 5. in which a single stepper motor 51 drives both the sheet feed roller 52 and the paper transport. When running in the forward direction the stepper motor drives the paper drive roller 53 and the pinch wheels 54 at the start and end of the active paper path, respectively. When reversed, the stepper motor drives the sheet feed roller 52 which grabs the topmost sheet from the sheet feeder and transports it the short distance to the paper drive roller 53 where it is detected by the mechanical media sensor 55.
  • the paper centering sliders 56 ensure that the paper is centered. This ensures that a single centered media sensor detects the sheet, and also ensures that sheets wider than the printhead are printed with balanced margins.
  • the replaceable Memjet printhead cartridge 60 is also shown in Figure 5. This represents one of the four possible ways to deploy the printhead in conjunction with the ink cartridge in a product such as iPrint:
  • iPrint includes a mechanical page width capping mechanism 62 which consists of a pivoting capping molding 64 with an elastomeric seal 65 and sponge 66.
  • the capping molding 64 When the printhead is not in use, the capping molding 64 is held by a spring against the face of the printhead assembly 61, and the elastomeric seal 65 conforms to the face of the printhead assembly and creates an airtight seal around the printhead 63.
  • the sponge 66 is used to catch drops ejected during the printhead cleaning cycle.
  • the capping molding 64 is held away from the printhead assembly 61 and out of the paper path.
  • the capping molding 64 is offset by a set of flexible arms 68 from a rod 69.
  • the capping molding 64 and arms 68 pivot with the rod 69 about its axis.
  • a slip wheel 70 is mounted at the end of rod 69.
  • the slip wheel 70 makes contact with a drive wheel 71.
  • the drive wheel 71 is coupled to the paper transport motor and is driven in the uncapping direction 72. This causes the slip wheel 70 and rod 69 to rotate about its axis and swings the capping molding 64 away from the printhead. Once the slip wheel rotates to the uncapping slip point 73, the slip wheel and the capping molding stop rotating.
  • the drive wheel is reversed and driven in the capping direction 74.
  • the printer controller 80 is illustrated in Figure 8, and consists of a small PCB 81 with only a few components - a 64Mbit RDRAM 82, the iPrint Central Processor (ICP) chip 83. a speaker 84 for notifying the user of error conditions, a QA chip 85, an external 3V DC power connection 86, an external USB connection 87. a connection to the paper transport stepper motor 88, and the flex PCB 89 which connects to the media sensor 55, LEDs 7. 9 and 10, buttons 6 and 8, and a link 90 the printhead 63.
  • ICP iPrint Central Processor
  • Printer Control Protocol This section describes the printer control protocol used between a host and iPrint. It includes control and status handling as well as the actual page description.
  • USB device class definition for printers [15] provides for emulation of both unidirectional and bidirectional IEEE 1284 parallel ports [3]. At its most basic level, this allows the host to determine printer capabilities (via GET_DEVICE_ID), obtain printer status (via GET_PORT_STATUS), and reset the printer (via SOFT_RESET). Centronics/IEEE 1284 printer status fields are described in Table 1 below.
  • iPrint supports no control protocol beyond the USB device class definition for printers. Note that, if a higher-level control protocol were defined, then conditions such as out-of-ink could also be reported to the user (rather than just via the printer's out-of-ink LED). iPrint receives page descriptions as raw transfers, i.e. not encapsulated in any higher-level control protocol.
  • Page Description iPrint reproduces black at full dot resolution (1600 dpi), but reproduces contone color at a somewhat lower resolution using halftoning.
  • the page description is therefore divided into a black layer and a contone layer.
  • the black layer is defined to composite over the contone layer.
  • the black layer consists of a bitmap containing a 1-bit opacity for each pixel.
  • This black layer matte has a resolution which is an integer factor of the printer's dot resolution.
  • the highest supported resolution is 1600 dpi, i.e. the printer's full dot resolution.
  • the contone layer consists of a bitmap containing a 32-bit CMYK color for each pixel.
  • This contone image has a resolution which is an integer factor of the printer's dot resolution.
  • the highest supported resolution is 267 ppi, i.e. one-sixth the printer's dot resolution.
  • the contone resolution is also typically an integer factor of the black resolution, to simplify calculations in the printer driver. This is not a requirement, however.
  • the black layer and the contone layer are both in compressed form for efficient transmission over the low-speed USB connection to the printer.
  • Page Structure iPrint has a printable page area which is determined by the width of its printhead. the characteristics of its paper path, and the size of the currently selected print medium.
  • the printable page area has a maximum width of 8". If the physical page width exceeds 8", then symmetric left and right margins are implicitly created. If the physical page width is less than 8", then the printable page width is reduced accordingly.
  • the printable page area has no maximum length. It is simply the physical page length, less the top and bottom margins imposed by the characteristics of the paper path.
  • the target page size is constrained by the printable page area, less the explicit (target) left and top margins specified in the page description.
  • iPrint does not impose a top or bottom margin - i.e. it allows full bleed in the vertical direction.
  • an artificial top and bottom margin is imposed to avoid having to include a sponge large enough to cope with regular off-edge printing.
  • Table 2 shows the format of the page description expected by iPrint.
  • each page description is complete and self-contained. There is no data transmitted to the printer separately from the page description to which the page description refers.
  • the page description contains a signature and version which allow the printer to identify the page description format. If the signature and/or version are missing or incompatible with the printer, then the printer can reject the page.
  • the page description defines the resolution and size of the target page.
  • the black and contone layers are clipped to the target page if necessary. This happens whenever the black or contone scale factors are not factors of the target page width or height.
  • the target left and top margins define the positioning of the target page within the printable page area.
  • the black layer parameters define the pixel size of the black layer, its integer scale factor to the target resolution, and the size of its compressed page data.
  • the variable-size black page data follows the fixed-size parts of the page description.
  • the contone layer parameters define the pixel size of the contone layer, its integer scale factor to the target resolution, and the size of its compressed page data.
  • the variable-size contone page data follows the variable-size black page data.
  • variable-size black page data and the variable-size contone page data are aligned to 8-byte boundaries.
  • the size of the required padding is included in the size of the fixed-size part of the page description structure and the variable-size black data.
  • the entire page description has a target size of less than 3MB, and a maximum size of 6MB. in accordance with page buffer memory in the printer.
  • the Group 3 Facsimile compression algorithm [1] losslessly compresses bi-level data for transmission over slow and noisy telephone lines.
  • the bi-level data represents scanned black text and graphics on a white background, and the algorithm is tuned for this class of images (it is explicitly not tuned, for example, for halfioned bi-level images).
  • the ID Group 3 algorithm runlength-encodes each scanline and then Huffman- encodes the resulting runlengths. Runlengths in the range 0 to 63 are coded with terminating codes. Runlengths in the range 64 to 2623 are coded with make-up codes, each representing a multiple of 64, followed by a terminating code. Runlengths exceeding 2623 are coded with multiple make-up codes followed by a terminating code.
  • the Huffman tables are fixed, but are separately tuned for black and white runs (except for make-up codes above
  • the 2D Group 3 algorithm encodes a scanline as a set of short edge deltas (0, ⁇ 1, ⁇ 2, ⁇ 3) with reference to the previous scanline.
  • the delta symbols are entropy-encoded (so that the zero delta symbol is only one bit long etc.)
  • Edges within a 2D-encoded line which can't be delta-encoded are runlength-encoded, and are identified by a prefix.
  • ID- and 2D-encoded lines are marked differently. ID-encoded lines are generated at regular intervals, whether actually required or not, to ensure that the decoder can recover from line noise with minimal image degradation.
  • 2D Group 3 achieves compression ratios of up to 6:1 [13].
  • the Group 4 Facsimile algorithm [1] losslessly compresses bi-level data for transmission over error-free communications lines (i.e. the lines are truly error- free, or error-correction is done at a lower protocol level).
  • the Group 4 algorithm is based on the 2D Group 3 algorithm, with the essential modification that since transmission is assumed to be error-free. ID-encoded lines are no longer generated at regular intervals as an aid to error-recovery.
  • Group 4 achieves compression ratios ranging from 20:1 to 60:1 for the CCITT set of test images [13].
  • the design goals and performance of the Group 4 compression algorithm qualify it as a compression algorithm for the bi-level black layer.
  • the edge delta and runlength (EDRL) compression format is based loosely on the Group 4 compression format and its precursors [1][17].
  • EDRL uses three kinds of symbols, appropriately entropy-coded. These are create edge, kill edge, and edge delta. Each line is coded with reference to its predecessor. The predecessor of the first line is defined to a line of white. Each line is defined to start off white. If a line actually starts of black (the less likely situation), then it must define a black edge at offset zero. Each line must define an edge at its left-hand end. i.e. at offset page width. An edge can be coded with reference to an edge in the previous line if there is an edge within the maximum delta range with the same sense (white- to-black or black-to-white). This uses one of the edge delta codes. The shorter and likelier deltas have the shorter codes. The maximum delta range ( ⁇ 2) is chosen to match the distribution of deltas for typical glyph edges. This distribution is mostly independent of point size. A typical example is given in Table 3.
  • An edge can also be coded using the length of the run from the previous edge in the same line. This uses one of the create edge codes for short (7-bit) and long (13-bit) runlengths. For simplicity, and unlike Group 4, runlengths are not entropy-coded. In order to keep edge deltas implicitly synchronised with edges in the previous line, each unused edge in the previous line is 'killed ' when passed in the current line. This uses the kill edge code. The end-of-page code signals the end of the page to the decoder.
  • runlengths are specifically chosen to support 800 dpi A4/Letter pages. Longer runlengths could be supported without significant impact on compression performance. For example, if supporting 1600 dpi compression, the runlengths should be at least 8-bit and 14-bit respectively. A general-purpose choice might be 8-bit and 16-bit, thus supporting up to 40" wide 1600 dpi pages.
  • the full set of codes is defined in Table 4. Note that there is no end-of- line code.
  • the decoder uses the page width to detect the end of the line.
  • the lengths of the codes are ordered by the relative probabilities of the codes' occurrence.
  • Figure 9 shows an example of coding a simple black and white image 90.
  • the image is arranged as lines 91 of pixels 92.
  • the first line 91 is assumed to be white and, since it is, is coded as ⁇ 0.
  • Note that the common situation of an all-white line following another all-white line is coded using a single bit ( ⁇ 0). and an all-black line following another all-black line is coded using two bits ( ⁇ 0, ⁇ 0).
  • the create code is used to define the edges.
  • the ⁇ - 1 and ⁇ + l codes are used to move the edges.
  • EDRL encoding example Note that the foregoing describes the compression format, not the compression algorithm per se. A variety of equivalent encodings can be produced for the same image, some more compact than others. For example, a pure runlength encoding conforms to the compression format. The goal of the compression algorithm is to discover a good, if not the best, encoding for a given image.
  • the following is a simple algorithm for producing the EDRL encoding of a line with reference to its predecessor.
  • Table 5 shows the compression performance of Group 4 and EDRL on the CCITT test documents used to select the Group 4 algorithm. Each document represents a single page scanned at 400 dpi. Group 4's superior performance is due to its entropy-coded runlengths. tuned to 400 dpi features.
  • Magazine text is typically typeset in a typeface with serifs (such as Times) at a point size of 10. At this size an A4/Letter page holds up to 14,000 characters, though a typical magazine page holds only about 7,000 characters. Text is seldom typeset at a point size smaller than 5. At 800 dpi, text cannot be meaningfully rendered at a point size lower than 2 using a standard typeface. Table 6 illustrates the legibility of various point sizes.
  • Table 7 shows Group 4 and EDRL compression performance on pages of text of varying point sizes, rendered at 800 dpi. Note that EDRL achieves the required compression ratio of 2.5 for an entire page of text typeset at a point size of 3. The distribution of characters on the test pages is based on English-language statistics [12].
  • EDRL slightly outperforms Group 4, simply because Group 4's runlength codes are tuned to 400 dpi.
  • JPEG compression algorithm lossily compresses a contone image at a specified quality level. It introduces imperceptible image degradation at compression ratios below 5:1, and negligible image degradation at compression ratios below 10:1 [16]. JPEG typically first transforms the image into a color space which separates luminance and chrominance into separate color channels. This allows the chrominance channels to be subsampled without appreciable loss because of the human visual system's relatively greater sensitivity to luminance than chrominance. After this first step, each color channel is compressed separately.
  • the image is divided into 8x8 pixel blocks. Each block is then transformed into the frequency domain via a discrete cosine transform (DCT).
  • DCT discrete cosine transform
  • This transformation has the effect of concentrating image energy in relatively lower-frequency coefficients, which allows higher-frequency coefficients to be more crudely quantized.
  • This quantization is the principal source of compression in JPEG. Further compression is achieved by ordering coefficients by frequency to maximise the likelihood of adjacent zero coefficients, and then runlength-encoding runs of zeroes. Finally, the runlengths and non-zero frequency coefficients are entropy coded. Decompression is the inverse process of compression.
  • the CMYK contone layer is compressed to an interleaved color JPEG bytestream.
  • the interleaving is required for space-efficient decompression in the printer, but may restrict the decoder to two sets of Huffman tables rather than four (i.e. one per color channel) [16]. If luminance and chrominance are separated, then the luminance channels can share one set of tables, and the chrominance channels the other set.
  • CMY is converted to YCrCb and Cr and Cb are duly subsampled.
  • K is treated as a luminance channel and is not subsampled.
  • the JPEG bytestream is complete and self-contained. It contains all data required for decompression, including quantization and Huffman tables.
  • An 8-inch Memjet printhead consists of two standard 4-inch Memjet printheads joined together side by side.
  • the two 4-inch printheads are wired up together in a specific way for use in iPrint. Since the wiring requires knowledge of the 4-inch printhead. an overview of the 4-inch printhead is presented here.
  • Each 4-inch printhead consists of 8 segments, each segment 1/2 an inch in length. Each of the segments prints bi-level cyan, magenta, yellow and black dots over a different part of the page to produce the final image.
  • each dot is approximately 22.5 microns in diameter, and spaced 15.875 microns apart.
  • each half- inch segment prints 800 dots, with the 8 segments corresponding to the positions shown in Table 8.
  • each dot is represented by a combination of bi-level cyan, magenta, yellow and black ink. Because the printing is bi-level. the input image should be dithered or error-diffused for best results.
  • Each segment then contains 3.200 nozzles: 800 each of cyan, magenta, yellow and black.
  • a four-inch printhead contains 8 such segments for a total of 25.600 nozzles.
  • the nozzles within a single segment are grouped for reasons of physical stability as well as minimization of power consumption during printing. In terms of physical stability, a total of 10 nozzles share the same ink reservoir. In terms of power consumption, groupings are made to enable a low-speed and a high-speed printing mode.
  • the printhead supports two printing speeds to albw speed/power consumption trade-offs to be made in different product configurations.
  • 128 nozzles are fired simultaneously from each 4-inch printhead.
  • the fired nozzles should be maximally distant, so 16 nozzles are fired from each segment.
  • In the high-speed printing mode 256 nozzles are fired simultaneously from each 4-inch printhead.
  • the fired nozzles should be maximally distant, so 32 nozzles are fired from each segment. To fire all 25,600 nozzles, 100 different sets of 256 nozzles must be fired.
  • the power consumption in the low-speed mode is half that of the high-speed mode. Note, however, that the energy consumed to print a page is the same in both cases.
  • a single pod 100 consists of 10 nozzles 101 sharing a common ink reservoir. 5 nozzles are in one row, and 5 are in another. Each nozzle produces dots 22.5 microns in diameter spaced on a 15.875 micron grid.
  • Figure 10 shows the arrangement of a single pod 100. with the nozzles 101 numbered according to the order in which they must be fired.
  • FIG. 11 shows the same pod 100 with the nozzles numbered according to the order in which they must be loaded. The nozzles within a pod are therefore logically separated by the width of 1 dot. The exact distance between the nozzles will depend on the properties of the Memjet firing mechanism.
  • the printhead is designed with staggered nozzles designed to match the flow of paper.
  • a Chromapod One pod of each color, that is cyan 121, magenta 122. yellow 123 and black 124, are grouped into a chromapod 125.
  • a chromapod represents different color components of the same horizontal set of 10 dots on different lines. The exact distance between different color pods depends on the Memjet operating parameters, and may vary from one Memjet design to another. The distance is considered to be a constant number of dot- widths, and must therefore be taken into account when printing: the dots printed by the cyan nozzles will be for different lines than those printed by the magenta, yellow or black nozzles. The printing algorithm must allow for a variable distance up to about 8 dot- widths between colors.
  • Figure 12 illustrates a single chromapod.
  • each chromapod contains 40 nozzles, each podgroup contains 200 nozzles:
  • 2 podgroups 126 are organized into a single phasegroup 127.
  • the phasegroup is so named because groups of nozzles within a phasegroup are fired simultaneously during a given firing phase (this is explained in more detail below).
  • the formation of a phasegroup from 2 podgroups is entirely for the purposes of low-speed and high-speed printing via 2 PodgroupEnable lines.
  • Figure 14 illustrates the composition of a phasegroup. The distance between adjacent podgroups is exaggerated for clarity.
  • PhasegroupA and PhasegroupB Two phasegroups 127 are organized into a single firegroup 128. with 4 firegroups in each segment 129. Firegroups are so named because they all fire the same nozzles simultaneously. Two enable lines. AEnable and BEnable. allow the firing of PhasegroupA nozzles and PhasegroupB nozzles independently as different firing phases. The arrangement is shown in Figure 15. The distance between adjacent groupings is exaggerated for clarity.
  • Table 9 is a summary of the nozzle groupings in a printhead.
  • An 8-inch printhead consists of two 4-inch printheads for a total of 51.200 nozzles.
  • a single 4-inch printhead contains a total of 25.600 nozzles.
  • a Print Cycle involves the firing of up to all of these nozzles, dependent on the information to be printed.
  • a Load Cycle involves the loading up of the printhead with the information to be printed during the subsequent Print Cycle.
  • Each nozzle has an associated NozzleEnable bit that determines whether or not the nozzle will fire during the Print Cycle.
  • the NozzleEnable bits (one per nozzle) are loaded via a set of shift registers. Logically there are 4 shift registers per segment (one per color), each 800 deep. As bits are shifted into the shift register for a given color they are directed to the lower and upper nozzles on alternate pulses. Internally, each 800-deep shift register is comprised of two 400-deep shift registers: one for the upper nozzles, and one for the lower nozzles. Alternate bits are shifted into the alternate internal registers. As far as the external interface is concerned however, there is a single 800 deep shift register.
  • the Load Cycle is concerned with loading the printhead's shift registers with the next Print Cycle's NozzleEnable bits.
  • Each segment has 4 inputs directly related to the cyan, magenta, yellow and black shift registers. These inputs are called CDataln. MDataln. YDataln and KDataln. Since there are 8 segments, there are a total of 32 color input lines per 4-inch printhead. A single pulse on the SRClock line (shared between all 8 segments) transfers the 32 bits into the appropriate shift registers. Alternate pulses transfer bits to the lower and upper nozzles respectively. Since there are 25,600 nozzles, a total of 800 pulses are required for the transfer. Once all 25,600 bits have been transferred, a single pulse on the shared PTransfer line causes the parallel transfer of data from the shift registers to the appropriate NozzleEnable bits.
  • the parallel transfer via a pulse on PTransfer must take place after the Print Cycle has finished. Otherwise the NozzleEnable bits for the line being printed will be incorrect. Since all 8 segments are loaded with a single SRClock pulse, any printing process must produce the data in the correct sequence for the printhead. As an example, the first SRClock pulse will transfer the CMYK bits for the next Print Cycle's dot 0. 800, 1600, 2400. 3200. 4000, 4800. and 5600. The second SRClock pulse will transfer the CMYK bits for the next
  • Data can be clocked into the printhead at a maximum rate of 20 MHz, which will load the entire data for the next line in 40 ⁇ s.
  • a 4-inch printhead contains 25.600 nozzles. To fire them all at once would consume too much power and be problematic in terms of ink refill and nozzle interference. Consequently two firing modes are defined: a low-speed printing mode and a high-speed printing mode:
  • ChromapodSelect (select 1 of 5 chromapods from a firegroup)
  • the duration of the firing pulse is given by the AEnable and BEnable lines, which fire the PhasegroupA and PhasegroupB nozzles from all firegroups respectively.
  • the typical duration of a firing pulse is 1.3 - 1.8 ⁇ s.
  • the duration of a pulse depends on the viscosity of the ink (dependent on temperature and ink characteristics) and the amount of power available to the printhead. See Section 6.1.3 for details on feedback from the printhead in order to compensate for temperature change.
  • the AEnable and BEnable are separate lines in order that the firing pulses can overlap.
  • the 200 phases of a low-speed Print Cycle consist of
  • FIG. 16 shows the Aenable 130 and Benable 131 lines during a typical Print Cycle. In a high-speed print there are 50 cycles of 2 ⁇ s each, while in a low-speed print there are 100 cycles of 2 ⁇ s each. As shown in the Figure, slight variations in minimum and maximum half cycle times about the nominal, are acceptable.
  • the firing order is:
  • ChromapodSelect 1. NozzleSelect 0. PodgroupEnable 01 (Phases A and B) ChromapodSelect 1. NozzleSelect 0. PodgroupEnable 10 (Phases A and B)
  • a nozzle When a nozzle fires, it takes approximately 100 ⁇ s to refill. The nozzle cannot be fired before this refill time has elapsed. This limits the fastest printing speed to 100 ⁇ s per line. In the high-speed print mode, the time to print a line is 100 ⁇ s, so the time between firing a nozzle from one line to the next matches the refill time. The low-speed print mode is slower than this, so is also acceptable.
  • the firing of a nozzle also causes acoustic perturbations for a limited time within the common ink reservoir of that nozzle's pod. The perturbations can interfere with the firing of another nozzle within the same pod. Consequently, the firing of nozzles within a pod should be offset from each other as long as possible. We therefore fire four nozzles from a chromapod (one nozzle per color) and then move onto the next chromapod within the podgroup.
  • the podgroups are fired separately.
  • the 5 chromapods within both podgroups must all fire before the first chromapod fires again, totalling 10 x 2 ⁇ cycles. Consequently each pod is fired once per 20 ⁇ s.
  • the podgroups are fired together.
  • the 5 chromapods within a single podgroups must all fire before the first chromapod fires again, totalling 5 x 2 ⁇ cycles. Consequently each pod is fired once per 10 ⁇ s.
  • the resonant frequency of the ink channel is 2.5MHz.
  • the low-speed mode allows 50 resonant cycles for the acoustic pulse to dampen
  • the high-speed mode allows 25 resonant cycles. Consequently any acoustic interference is minimal in both cases.
  • the printhead produces several lines of feedback (accumulated from the 8 segments).
  • the feedback lines are used to adjust the timing of the firing pulses. Although each segment produces the same feedback, the feedback from all segments share the same tri-state bus lines. Consequently only one segment at a time can provide feedback.
  • a pulse on the SenseSegSelect line ANDed with data on Cyan selects which segment will provide the feedback.
  • the feedback sense lines will come from the selected segment until the next SenseSegSelect pulse.
  • the feedback sense lines are as follows:
  • Tsense informs the controller how hot the printhead is. This allows the controller to adjust timing of firing pulses, since temperature affects the viscosity of the ink.
  • Vsense informs the controller how much voltage is available to the actuator. This allows the controller to compensate for a flat battery or high voltage source by adjusting the pulse width.
  • Wsense informs the controller of the width of the critical part of the heater, which may vary up to ⁇ 5% due to lithographic and etching variations. This allows the controller to adjust the pulse width appropriately.
  • the printing process has a strong tendency to stay at the equilibrium temperature. To ensure that the first section of the printed photograph has a consistent dot size, the equilibrium temperature must be met before printing any dots. This is accomplished via a preheat cycle.
  • the Preheat cycle involves a single Load Cycle to all nozzles with Is (i.e. setting all nozzles to fire), and a number of short firing pulses to each nozzle.
  • the duration of the pulse must be insufficient to fire the drops, but enough to heat up the ink. Altogether about 200 pulses for each nozzle are required, cycling through in the same sequence as a standard Print Cycle.
  • Tsense Feedback during the Preheat mode is provided by Tsense, and continues until equilibrium temperature is reached (about 30° C above ambient).
  • the duration of the Preheat mode is around 50 milliseconds, and depends on the ink composition.
  • Preheat is performed before each print job. This does not affect performance as it is done while the data is being transferred to the printer.
  • the cleaning cycle involves a single Load Cycle to all nozzles with Is (i.e. setting all nozzles to fire), and a number of firing pulses to each nozzle.
  • the nozzles are cleaned via the same nozzle firing sequence as a standard Print Cycle. The number of times that each nozzle is fired depends upon the ink composition and the time that the printer has been idle. As with preheat, the cleaning cycle has no effect on printer performance.
  • a single 4-inch printhead has the connections shown in Table 11:
  • each segment has the connections to the bond pads shown in Table 12:
  • An 8-inch Memjet printhead is simply two 4-inch printheads physically placed together.
  • the printheads are wired together and share many common connections in order that the number of pins from a controlling chip is reduced and that the two printheads can print simultaneously. A number of details must be considered because of this.
  • the ChromapodSelect, NozzleSelect, AEnable and BEnable lines are shared.
  • the 32 lines of CDataln. MDataln, YDataln and KDataln are shared, and 2 different SRClock lines are used to determine which of the two printheads is to be loaded.
  • a single PTransfer pulse is used to transfer the loaded data into the NozzleEnable bits for both printheads.
  • the Tsense. Vsense. Rsense. and Wsense lines are shared, with 2 SenseEnable lines to distinguish between the two printheads. Therefore the two 4-inch printheads share all connections except SRClock and SenseEnable. These two connections are repeated, once for each printhead. The actual connections are shown here in Table 13:
  • the high-speed print mode allows a 4- inch printhead to print an entire line in 100 ⁇ s. Both 4-inch printheads must therefore be run in high-speed print mode to print simultaneously. Therefore 512 nozzles fire per firing pulse, thereby enabling the printing of an 8-inch line within the specified time.
  • the printer controller consists of the iPrint central processor (ICP) chip 83. a 64MBit RDRAM 82. and the master QA chip 85. as shown in Figure 8.
  • the ICP 83 contains a general-purpose processor 139 and a set of purpose-specific functional units controlled by the processor via the processor bus. as shown in Figure 17. Only three functional units are non- standard - the EDRL expander 140, the halftoner/compositor 141, and the printhead interface 142 which controls the Memjet printhead. Software running on the processor coordinates the various functional units to receive, expand and print pages. This is described in the next section.
  • Page expansion and printing proceeds as follows.
  • a page description is received from the host via the USB interface 146 and is stored in main memory.
  • 6MB of main memory is dedicated to page storage. This can hold two pages each not exceeding 3MB, or one page up to 6MB. If the host generates pages not exceeding 3MB, then the printer operates in streaming mode - i.e. it prints one page while receiving the next. If the host generates pages exceeding 3MB, then the printer operates in single-page mode - i.e. it receives each page and prints it before receiving the next. If the host generates pages exceeding 6MB then they are rejected by the printer. In practice the printer driver prevents this from happening.
  • a page consists of two parts - the bi-level black layer, and the contone layer. These are compressed in distinct formats - the bi-level black layer in EDRL format, the contone layer in JPEG format.
  • the first stage of page expansion consists of decompressing the two layers in parallel.
  • the bi-level layer is decompressed 16 by the EDRL expander unit 140.
  • the contone layer 14 by the JPEG decoder 143.
  • the second stage of page expansion consists of halftoning 15 the contone CMYK data to bi-level CMYK, and then compositing 17 the bi-level black layer over the bi-level CMYK layer.
  • the halftoning and compositing is carried out by the halftoner/compositor unit 141.
  • the composited ' bi-level CMYK image is printed 18 via the printhead interface unit 142. which controls the Memjet printhead. Because the Memjet printhead prints at high speed, the paper must move past the printhead at a constant velocity. If the paper is stopped because data can't be fed to the printhead fast enough, then visible printing irregularities will occur. It is therefore important to transfer bi-level CMYK data to the printhead interface at the required rate.
  • a fully-expanded 1600 dpi bi-level CMYK page has a size of 114.3MB. Because it is impractical to store an expanded page in printer memory, each page is expanded in real time during printing. Thus the various stages of page expansion and printing are pipelined.
  • the page expansion and printing data flow is described in Table 14. The aggregate traffic to/from main memory of
  • 174MB/s is well within the capabilities of current technologies such as Rambus.
  • Each stage communicates with the next via a shared FIFO in main memory.
  • Each FIFO is organised into lines, and the minimum size (in lines) of each FIFO is designed to accommodate the output window (in lines) of the producer and the input window (in lines) of the consumer.
  • the inter-stage main memory buffers are described in Table 15. The aggregate buffer space usage of 6.3MB leaves 1.7MB free for program code and scratch memory (out of the 8MB available).
  • Each functional unit contains one or more on-chip input and/or output FIFOs.
  • Each FIFO is allocated a separate channel in the multi-channel DMA controller 144.
  • the DMA controller 144 handles single-address rather than double-address transfers, and so provides a separate request/acknowledge interface for each channel.
  • Each functional unit stalls gracefully whenever an input FIFO is exhausted or an output FIFO is filled.
  • the processor 139 programs each DMA transfer.
  • the DMA controller 144 generates the address for each word of the transfer on request from the functional unit connected to the channel.
  • the functional unit latches the word onto or off the data bus 145 when its request is acknowledged by the DMA controller 144.
  • the DMA controller 144 interrupts the processor 139 when the transfer is complete, thus allowing the processor 139 to program another transfer on the same channel in a timely fashion.
  • processor 139 will program another transfer on a channel as soon as the corresponding main memory FIFO is available (i.e. non-empty for a read, non-full for a write).
  • the granularity of channel servicing implemented in the DMA controller 144 depends somewhat on the latency of main memory.
  • the EDRL expander uni ' t (EEU) 140 shown in Figure 19, decompresses an EDRL-compressed bi-level image.
  • the input to the EEU is an EDRL bitstream 150.
  • the output from the EEU is a set of bi-level image lines 151, scaled horizontally from the resolution of the expanded bi-level image by an integer scale factor to 1600 dpi.
  • the EEU proceeds until it detects an end-of-page code in the EDRL bitstream. or until it is explicitly stopped via its control register.
  • the EEU relies on an explicit page width to decode the bitstream. This must be written to the page width register 152 prior to starting the EEU.
  • the scaling of the expanded bi-level image relies on an explicit scale factor. This must be written to the scale factor register 153 prior to starting the EEU.
  • the EDRL compression format is described in Section 5.2.3. It represents a bi-level image in terms of its edges. Each edge in each line is coded relative to an edge in the previous line, or relative to the previous edge in the same line. No matter how it is coded, each edge is ultimately decoded to its distance from the previous edge in the same line. This distance, or runlength, is then decoded to the string of one bits or zero bits which represent the corresponding part of the image.
  • the decompression algorithm is also defined in Section 5.2.3.2.
  • the EEU consists of a bitstream decoder 154. a state machine 155. edge calculation logic 156, two runlength decoders 157 and 158. and a runlength (re)encoder 159.
  • the bitstream decoder 154 decodes an entropy-coded codeword from the bitstream and passes it to the state machine 155.
  • the state machine 155 returns the size of the codeword to the bitstream decoder 154, which allows the decoder 154 to advance to the next codeword.
  • the state machine 155 uses the bitstream decoder to extract the corresponding runlength from the bitstream.
  • the state machine controls the edge calculation logic and runlength decoding/encoding as defined in Table
  • the edge calculation logic is quite simple.
  • the current edge offset in the previous (reference) and current (coding) lines are maintained in the reference edge register 160 and edge register 161 respectively.
  • the runlength associated with a create edge code is output directly to the runlength decoders, and is added to the current edge.
  • a delta code is translated into a runlength by adding the associated delta to the reference edge and subtracting the current edge.
  • the generated runlength is output to the runlength decoders, and is added to the current edge.
  • the next runlength is extracted from the runlength encoder 159 and added to the reference edge 160.
  • a kill edge code simply causes the current reference edge to be skipped.
  • next runlength is extracted from the runlength encoder and added to the reference edge.
  • the expanded line accumulates in a line buffer 162 large enough to hold an 8" 800 dpi line (800 bytes). The previously expanded line is also buffered 163. It acts as a reference for the decoding of the current line. The previous line is re-encoded as runlengths on demand.
  • the runlength encoder 159 encodes the run it generates a stall signal to the state machine.
  • the runlength encoder uses the page width 152 to detect end-of-line.
  • the (current) line buffer 162 and the previous line buffer 163 are concatenated and managed as a single FIFO to simplify the runlength ' encoder 159.
  • Runlength decoder 158 decodes the output runlength to a line buffer 164 large enough to hold an 8" 1600 dpi line (1600 bytes).
  • the runlength passed to this output runlength decoder is multiplied by the scale factor 153, so this decoder produces 1600 dpi lines.
  • the line is output scale factor times through the output pixel FIFO 165. This achieves the required vertical scaling by simple line replication.
  • the EEU could be designed with edge smoothing integrated into its image scaling. A simple smoothing scheme based on template-matching can be very effective [10]. This would require a multi-line buffer between the low-resolution runlength decoder and the smooth scaling unit, but would eliminate the high-resolution runlength decoder.
  • the EDRL stream decoder 154 decodes entropy-coded EDRL codewords in the input bitstream. It uses a two-byte input buffer 167 viewed through a 16-bit barrel shifter 168 whose left (most significant) edge is always aligned to a codeword boundary in the bitstream.
  • the decoder 169 connected to the barrel shifter 168 decodes a codeword according to Table 17. and supplies the state machine 155 with the corresponding code.
  • the state machine 155 in turn outputs the length of the code. This is added 170, modulo-8, to the current codeword bit offset to yield the next codeword bit offset.
  • the bit offset in turn controls the barrel shifter 168. If the codeword bit offset wraps, then the carry bit controls the latching of the next byte from the input FIFO 166. At this time byte 2 is latched to byte 1, and the FIFO output is latched to byte 2. It takes two cycles of length 8 to fill the input buffer. This is handled by starting states in the state machine 155. 7.2.2.2 EDRL Expander State Machine
  • the EDRL expander state machine 155 controls the edge calculation and runlength expansion logic in response to codes supplied by the EDRL stream decoder 154. It supplies the EDRL stream decoder with the length of the current codeword and supplies the edge calculation logic with the delta value associated with the current delta code. The state machine also responds to start and stop control signals from the control register, and the end-of-line (EOL) signal from the edge calculation logic.
  • EOL end-of-line
  • the state machine also controls the multi-cycle fetch of the runlength associated with a create edge code.
  • the runlength decoder 157/158 expands a runlength into a sequence of zero bits or one bits of the corresponding length in the output stream.
  • the first run in a line is assumed to be white (color 0).
  • Each run is assumed to be of the opposite color to its predecessor. If the first run is actually black (color 1), then it must be preceded by a zero-length white run.
  • the runlength decoder keeps track of the current color internally.
  • the runlength decoder appends a maximum of 8 bits to the output stream every clock. Runlengths are typically not an integer multiple of 8, and so runs other than the first in an image are typically not byte-aligned.
  • the run decoder maintains, in the byte space register 180, the number of bits available in the byte currently being built. This is initialised to 8 at the beginning of decoding, and on the output of every byte.
  • the decoder starts outputting a run of bits as soon as the next run line latches a non-zero value into the runlength register 181.
  • the decoder effectively stalls when the runlength register goes to zero.
  • a number of bits of the current color are shifted into the output byte register 182 each clock.
  • the current color is maintained in the 1-bit color register 183.
  • the number of bits actually output is limited by the number of bits left in the runlength. and by the number of spare bits left in the output byte.
  • the number of bits output is subtracted from the runlength and the byte space. When the runlength goes to zero it has been completely decoded, although the trailing bits of the run may still be in the output byte register, pending output. When the byte space goes to zero the output byte is full and is appended to the output stream.
  • the external reset line is used to reset the runlength decoder at the start of a line.
  • the external next run line is used to request the decoding of a new runlength. It is accompanied by a runlength on the external runlength lines.
  • the next run line should not be set on the same clock as the reset line. Because next run inverts the current color, the reset of the color sets it to one, not zero.
  • the external flush line is used to flush the last byte of the run, if incomplete. It can be used on a line-by-line basis to yield byte-aligned lines, or on an image basis to yield a byte-aligned image.
  • the external ready line indicates whether the runlength decoder is ready to decode a runlength. It can be used to stall the external logic.
  • the runlength encoder 159 detects a run of zero or one bits in the input stream.
  • the first run in a line is assumed to be white (color 0).
  • Each run is assumed to be of the opposite color to its predecessor. If the first run is actually black (color 1), then the runlength encoder generates a zero-length white run at the start of the line.
  • the runlength decoder keeps track of the current color internally.
  • the runlength encoder reads a maximum of 8 bits from the input stream every clock. It uses a two-byte input buffer 190 viewed through a 16- bit barrel shifter 191 whose left (most significant) edge is always aligned to the current position in the bitstream.
  • the encoder 192 connected to the barrel shifter encodes an 8-bit (partial) runlength according to Table 19.
  • the encoder 192 uses the current color to recognise runs of the appropriate color.
  • the 8-bit runlength generated by the 8-bit runlength encoder is added to the value in the runlength register 193. When the 8-bit runlength encoder recognises the end of the current run it generates an end-of-run signal which is latched by the ready register 194.
  • the output of the ready register 194 indicates that the encoder has completed encoding the current runlength, accumulated in the runlength register 193.
  • the output of the ready register 194 is also used to stall the 8-bit runlength encoder 192. When stalled the 8- bit runlength encoder 192 outputs a zero-length run and a zero end-of-run signal, effectively stalling the entire runlength encoder.
  • the output of the 8-bit runlength encoder 192 is limited by the remaining page width.
  • the actual 8-bit runlength is subtracted from the remaining page width, and is added 195 to the modulo-8 bit position used to control the barrel shifter 191 and clock the byte stream input.
  • the external reset line is used to reset the runlength encoder at the start of a line. It resets the current color and latches the page width into the page width register.
  • the external next run line is used to request another runlength from the runlength encoder. It inverts the current color, and resets the runlength register and ready register.
  • the external flush line is used to flush the last byte of the run, if incomplete. It can be used on a line-by-line basis to process byte-aligned lines, or on an image basis to process a byte- aligned image.
  • the external ready line indicates that the runlength encoder is ready to encode a runlength. and that the current runlength is available on the runlength lines. It can be used to stall the external logic.
  • the JPEG decoder 143 shown in Figure 23. decompresses a JPEG- compressed CMYK contone image.
  • the input to the JPEG decoder is a JPEG bitstream.
  • the output from the JPEG decoder is a set of contone CMYK image lines.
  • the JPEG decoder When decompressing, the JPEG decoder writes its output in the form of 8x8 pixel blocks. These are sometimes converted to full-width lines via an page width x 8 strip buffer closely coupled with the codec. This would require a 67KB buffer.
  • the halftoner/compositor unit (HCU) 141 shown in Figure 24, combines the functions of halftoning the contone CMYK layer to bi-level CMYK, and compositing the black layer over the halftoned contone layer.
  • the input to the HCU is ' an expanded 267 ppi CMYK contone layer 200, and an expanded 1600 dpi black layer 201.
  • the output from the HCU is a set of 1600 dpi bi-level CMYK image lines 202. Once started, the HCU proceeds until it detects an end-of-page condition, or until it is explicitly stopped via its control register.
  • the HCU generates a page of dots of a specified width and length.
  • the width and length must be written to the page width and page length registers prior to starting the HCU.
  • the page width corresponds to the width of the printhead 171.
  • the page length corresponds to the length of the target page.
  • the HCU generates target page data between specified left and right margins relative to the page width.
  • the positions of the left and right margins must be written to the left margin and right margin registers prior to starting the HCU.
  • the distance from the left margin to the right margin corresponds to the target page width.
  • the HCU consumes black and contone data according to specified black 172 and contone 173 page widths. These page widths must be written to the black page width and contone page width registers prior to starting the HCU.
  • the HCU clips black and contone data to the target page width 174.
  • the HCU scales contone data to printer resolution both horizontally and vertically based on a specified scale factor. This scale factor must be written to the contone scale factor register prior to starting the HCU.
  • the consumer of the data produced by the HCU is the printhead interface.
  • the printhead interface requires bi-level CMYK image data in planar format, i.e. with the color planes separated. Further, it also requires that even and odd pixels are separated.
  • the output stage of the HCU therefore uses 8 parallel pixel FIFOs, one each for even cyan, odd cyan, even magenta, odd magenta, even yellow, odd yellow, even black, and odd black.
  • the input contone CMYK FIFO is a full 8KB line buffer.
  • the line is used contone scale factor times to effect vertical up-scaling via line replication. FIFO write address wrapping is disabled until the start of the last use of the line.
  • An alternative is to read the line from main memory contone scale factor times, increasing memory traffic by 65MB/s, but avoiding the need for the on-chip 8KB line buffer.
  • a general 256-layer dither volume provides great flexibility in dither cell design, by decoupling different intensity levels.
  • General dither volumes can be large - a 64x 64x 256 dither volume, for example, has a size of 128KB. They are also inefficient to access since each color component requires the retrieval of a different bit from the volume. In practice, there is no need to fully decouple each layer of the dither volume.
  • Each dot column of the volume can be implemented as a fixed set of thresholds rather than 256 separate bits. Using three 8-bit thresholds, for example, only consumes 24 bits.
  • n thresholds define n + 1 intensity intervals, within which the corresponding dither cell location is alternately not set or set. The contone pixel value being dithered uniquely selects one of the n + 1 intervals, and this determines the value of the corresponding output dot.
  • the three thresholds form a convenient 24-bit value which can be retrieved from the dither cell ROM in one cycle. If dither cell registration is desired between color planes, then the same triple-threshold value can be retrieved once and used to dither each color component. If dither cell registration is not desired, then the dither cell can be split into four sub-cells and stored in four separately addressable ROMs from which four different triple-threshold values can be retrieved in parallel in one cycle. Using the addressing scheme shown in Figure 26, the four color planes share the same dither cell at vertical and/or horizontal offsets of 32 dots from each other.
  • the Multi-threshold dither 203 is shown in Figure 26.
  • the triple- threshold unit 204 converts a triple-threshold value and an intensity value into an interval and thence a one or zero bit.
  • the triple-thresholding rules are shown in Table 21.
  • the corresponding logic 208 is shown in Figure 27.
  • four separate triple threshold units indicated generally at 204 each receive a series of contone color pixel values for respective color components of the CMYK signal.
  • the dither volume is split into four dither subcells A. B, C and D. indicated generally at
  • the composite unit 205 composites a black layer dot over a halftoned CMYK layer dot. If the black layer opacity is one, then the halftoned CMY is set to zero.
  • the composite and clip logic is as defined in Table 22.
  • the clock enable generator 206 generates enable signals for clocking the contone CMYK pixel input, the black dot input, and the CMYK dot output.
  • the contone pixel input buffer is used as both a line buffer and a FIFO.
  • Each line is read once and then used contone scale factor times.
  • FIFO write address wrapping is disabled until the start of the final replicated use of the line, at which time the clock enable generator generates a contone line advance enable signal which enables wrapping.
  • the clock enable generator also generates an even signal which is used to select the even or odd set of output dot FIFOs, and a margin signal which is used to generate white dots when the current dot position is in the left or right margin of the page.
  • the clock enable generator uses a set of counters.
  • the internal logic of the counters is defined in Table 23.
  • the logic of the clock enable signals is defined in Table 24.
  • the printhead interface (PHI) 142 is the means by which the processor loads the Memjet printhead with the dots to be printed, and controls the actual dot printing process.
  • the PHI contains:
  • a line loader/format unit (LLFU) 209 which loads the dots for a given print line into local buffer storage and formats them into the order required for the Memjet printhead.
  • a Memjet interface MJI 210, which transfers data to the Memjet printhead 63. and controls the nozzle firing sequences during a print.
  • the units within the PHI are controlled by a number of registers that are programmed by the processor 139.
  • the processor is responsible for setting up the appropriate parameters in the DMA controller 144 for the transfers from memory to the LLFU. This includes loading white
  • the line loader/format unit (LLFU) 209 loads the dots for a given print line into local buffer storage and formats them into the order required for the Memjet printhead. It is responsible for supplying the pre-calculated nozzleEnable bits to the Memjet interface for the eventual printing of the page.
  • a single line in the 8-inch printhead consists of 12.800 4-color dots. At 1 bit per color, a single print line consists of 51,200 bits. These bits must be supplied in the correct order for being sent on to the printhead. See Section 6.1.2.1 for more information concerning the Load Cycle dot loading order, but in summary. 32 bits are transferred at a time to each of the two 4-inch printheads. with the 32 bits representing 4 dots for each of the 8 segments.
  • the printing uses a double buffering scheme for preparing and accessing the dot-bit information. While one line is being loaded into the first buffer 213, the pre-loaded line in the second buffer 214 is being read in
  • a multiplexor 215 chooses between the two 4-bit outputs of Buffer 0. 213 and Buffer 1. 214. and sends the result to an 8-entry by 4-bit shift register 216. After the first 8 read cycles, and whenever an Advance pulse comes from the MJI, the current 32-bit value from the shift register is gated into the 32-bit Transfer register 217, where it can be used by the MJI. 7.3.1.1 Buffers
  • Each of the two buffers 213 and 214 is broken into 4 sub-buffers 220. 221. 222 and 223. 1 per color. All the even dots are placed before the odd dots in each color's buffer, as shown in Figure 31.
  • the 51,200 bits representing the dots in the next line to be printed are stored 12.800 bits per color buffer, stored as 400 32-bit words.
  • the first 200 32-bit words (6400 bits) represent the even dots for the color, while the second 200 32-bit words (6400 bits) represent the odd dots for the color.
  • the addressing decoding circuitry is such that in a given cycle, a single
  • 32-bit access can be made to all 4 sub-buffers - either a read from all 4 or a write to one of the 4. Only one bit of the 32-bits read from each color buffer is selected, for a total of 4 output bits.
  • the process is shown in Figure 32. 13 bits of address allow the reading of a particular bit by means of 8-bits of address being used to select 32 bits, and 5-bits of address choose 1-bit from those 32. Since all color buffers share this logic, a single 13-bit address gives a total of 4 bits out, one per color.
  • Each buffer has its own WriteEnable line, to allow a single 32-bit value to be written to a particular color buffer in a given cycle.
  • the 32-bits of Dataln are shared, since only one buffer will actually clock the data in.
  • CurrAdr CurrAdr + 400
  • CurrReadBuffer value must be toggled by the processor.
  • the write process is also straightforward. 4 DMA request lines are output to the DMA controller. As requests are satisfied by the return DMA Acknowledge lines, the appropriate 8-bit destination address is selected (the lower 5 bits of the 13-bit output address are don't care values) and the acknowledge signal is passed to the correct buffer's WriteEnable control line (the Current Write Buffer is CurrentReadBuffer). The 8-bit destination address is selected from the 4 current addresses, one address per color. As DMA requests are satisfied the appropriate destination address is incremented, and the corresponding TransfersRemaining counter is decremented. The DMA request line is only set when the number of transfers remaining for that color is non-zero.
  • TransfersRemaining [N] TransfersRemainingfN] - 1 (floor 0) Endlf EndWhile
  • the Memjet interface (MJI) 211 transfers data to the Memjet printhead 63. and controls the nozzle firing sequences during a print.
  • the MJI is simply a State Machine (see Figure 28) which follows the Printhead loading and firing order described in Section 6.1.2, and includes the functionality of the Preheat Cycle and Cleaning Cycle as described in Section 6.1.4 and Section 6.1.5. Both high-speed and low-speed printing modes are available. Dot counts for each color are also kept by the MJI.
  • the MJI loads data into the printhead from a choice of 2 data sources:
  • the MJI must be started after the LLFU has already prepared the first 32-bit transfer value. This is so the 32-bit data input will be valid for the first transfer to the printhead.
  • the MJI is therefore directly connected to the LLFU and the external Memjet printhead.
  • the MJI 211 has the following connections to the printhead 63. with the sense of input and output with respect to the MJI.
  • the names match the pin connections on the printhead (see Section 6.2.1 for an explanation of the way the 8-inch printhead is wired up).
  • the duration of firing pulses on the AEnable and BEnable lines depend on the viscosity of the ink (which is dependant on temperature and ink characteristics) and the amount of power available to the printhead.
  • the typical pulse duration range is 1.3 to 1.8 ⁇ s.
  • the MJI therefore contains a programmable pulse duration table 230, indexed by feedback from the printhead. The table of pulse durations allows the use of a lower cost power supply, and aids in maintaining more accurate drop ejection.
  • the Pulse Duration table has 256 entries, and is indexed by the current Vsense 231 and Tsense 232 settings.
  • the upper 4-bits of address come from Vsense. and the lower 4-bits of address come from Tsense.
  • Each entry is 8- bits. and represents a fixed point value in the range of 0-4 ⁇ s.
  • the process of generating the AEnable and BEnable lines is shown in Figure 33. The analog
  • Vsense 231 and Tsense 232 signals are received by respective sample and hold circuits 233 and 234. and then converted to digital words in respective converters 235 and 236. before being applied to the pulse duration table 230.
  • the output of the pulse duration table 230 is applied to a pulse width generator 237 to generate the firing pulses.
  • the 256-byte table is written by the CPU before printing the first page.
  • the table may be updated in between pages if desired.
  • Each 8-bit pulse duration entry in the table combines:
  • the MJI 211 maintains a count of the number of dots of each color fired from the printhead in a dot count register 240.
  • the dot count for each color is a 32-bit value, individually cleared, by a signal 241, under processor control. At 32-bits length, each dot count can hold a maximum coverage dot count of 17 12-inch pages, although in typical usage, the dot count will be read and cleared after each page.
  • the dot counts are used by the processor to update the QA chip 85 (see Section 7.5.4.1) in order to predict when the ink cartridge runs out of ink.
  • the processor knows the volume of ink in the cartridge for each of C, M, Y, and K from the QA chip. Counting the number of drops eliminates the need for ink sensors, and prevents the ink channels from running dry. An updated drop count is written to the QA chip after each page. A new page will not be printed unless there is enough ink left, and allows the user to change the ink without getting a dud half-printed page which must be reprinted.
  • the layout of the dot counter for cyan is shown in Figure 34.
  • the remaining 3 dot counters (MDotCount. YDotCount. and KDotCount for magenta, yellow, and black respectively) are identical in structure.
  • the processor 139 communicates with the MJI 211 via a register set.
  • the registers allow the processor to parameterize a print as well as receive feedback about print progress.
  • the MJI's Status Register is a 16-bit register with bit interpretations as follows:
  • the processor 139 runs the control program which synchronises the other functional units during page reception, expansion and printing. It also runs the device drivers for the various external interfaces, and responds to user actions through the user interface.
  • the DMA controller supports single-address transfers on 27 channels (see Table 29). It generates vectored interrupts to the processor on transfer completion.
  • the program ROM holds the ICP control program which is loaded into main memory during system boot.
  • the Rambus interface provides the high-speed interface to the external 8MB (64Mbit) Rambus DRAM (RDRAM).
  • 8MB 64Mbit
  • RDRAM Rambus DRAM
  • USB Universal Serial Bus
  • the speaker interface 250 ( Figure 35) contains a small FIFO 251 used for DMA-mediated transfers of sound clips from main memory, an 8-bit digital-to-analog converter (DAC) 252 which converts each 8-bit sample value to a voltage, and an amplifier 253 which feeds the external speaker. When the FIFO is empty it outputs a zero value.
  • the speaker interface is clocked at the frequency of the sound clips.
  • the processor outputs a sound clip to the speaker simply by programming the DMA channel of the speaker interface.
  • the parallel interface 231 provides I/O on a number of parallel external signal lines. It allows the processor to sense or control the devices listed in Table 30. TABLE 30Parallel Interface devices parallel interface devices power button paper feed button power LED out-of-paper LED ink low LED media sensor paper transport stepper motor
  • the serial interface 232 provides two standard low-speed serial ports.
  • One port is used to connect to the master QA chip 85.
  • the other is used to connect to the QA chip in the ink cartridge 233.
  • the processor- mediated protocol between the two is used to authenticate the ink cartridge.
  • the processor can then retrieve ink characteristics from the QA chip, as well as the remaining volume of each ink.
  • the processor uses the ink characteristics to properly configure the Memjet printhead. It uses the remaining ink volumes, updated on a page-by-page basis with ink consumption information accumulated by the printhead interface, to ensure that it never allows the printhead to be damaged by running dry.
  • the QA chip 233 in the ink cartridge contains information required for maintaining the best possible print quality, and is implemented using an authentication chip.
  • the 256 bits of data in the authentication chip are allocated as follows:
  • the processor Before each page is printed, the processor must check the amount of ink remaining to ensure there is enough for an entire worst-case page. Once the page has been printed, the processor multiplies the total number of drops of each color (obtained from the printhead interface) by the drop volume. The amount of printed ink is subtracted from the amount of ink remaining. The unit of measurement for ink remaining is nanolitres. so 32 bits can represent over 4 litres of ink. The amount of ink used for a page must be rounded up to the nearest nanolitre (i.e. approximately 1000 printed dots).
  • JTAG Joint Test Action Group
  • BIST Busilt In Self Test
  • An overhead of 10% in chip area is assumed for overall chip testing circuitry.
  • This section describes generic aspects of any host-based printer driver for iPrint.
  • iPrint-specific CMYK color in a standard way, based on a user-selected iPrint-specific ICC (International Color Consortium) color profile.
  • the color profile is normally selected implicitly by the user when the user specifies the output medium in the printer (i.e. plain paper, coated paper, transparency, etc.).
  • the page description sent to the printer always contains device-specific CMYK color.
  • the host graphics system renders images and graphics to a nominal resolution specified by the printer driver, but that it allows the printer driver to take control of rendering text.
  • the graphics system provides sufficient information to the printer driver to allow it to render and position text at a higher resolution than the nominal device resolution.
  • the printer ' s page description contains a 267 ppi contone layer and an
  • the black layer is conceptually above the contone layer, i.e. the black layer is composited over the contone layer by the printer.
  • the printer driver therefore maintains a page buffer 260 which correspondingly contains a medium- resolution contone layer 261 and a high-resolution black layer 262.
  • the graphics systems renders and composites objects into the page buffer bottom-up - i.e. later objects obscure earlier objects. This works naturally when there is only a single layer, but not when there are two layers which will be composited later. It is therefore necessary to detect when an object being placed on the contone layer obscures something on the black layer.
  • the obscured black pixels are composited with the contone layer and removed from the black layer.
  • the obscuring object is then laid down on the contone layer, possibly interacting with the black pixels in some way. If the compositing mode of the obscuring object is such that no interaction with the background is possible, then the black pixels can simply be discarded without being composited with the contone layer. In practice, of course, there is little interaction between the contone layer and the black layer.
  • the printer driver specifies a nominal page resolution of 267 ppi to the graphics system. Where possible the printer driver relies on the graphics system to render image and graphics objects to the pixel level at 267 ppi, with the exception of black text.
  • the printer driver fields all text rendering requests, detects and renders black text at 800 dpi, but returns non-black text rendering requests to the graphics system for rendering at 267 ppi.
  • the graphics system and the printer driver manipulate color in device-independent RGB, deferring conversion to device-specific CMYK until the page is complete and ready to be sent to the printer. This reduces page buffer requirements and makes compositing more rational. Compositing in CMYK color space is not ideal.
  • the graphics system asks the printer driver to composite each rendered object into the printer driver's page buffer.
  • Each such object uses 24-bit contone RGB. and has an explicit (or implicitly opaque) opacity channel.
  • the printer driver maintains the two-layer page buffer 260 in three parts.
  • the first part is the medium-resolution (267 ppi) contone layer 261. This consists of a 24-bit RGB bitmap.
  • the second part is a medium-resolution black layer 263. This consists of an 8-bit opacity bitmap.
  • the third part is a high-resolution (800 dpi) black layer 262. This consists of a 1-bit opacity bitmap.
  • the medium- resolution black layer is a subsampled version of the high-resolution opacity layer.
  • each medium-resolution opacity value is obtained by averaging the corresponding n x n high-resolution opacity values. This corresponds to box-filtered subsampling.
  • the subsampling of the black pixels effectively antialiases edges in the high-resolution black layer, thereby reducing ringing artefacts when the contone layer is subsequently JPEG-compressed and decompressed.
  • the structure and size of the page buffer is illustrated in Figure 36.
  • the black layer is updated as follows:
  • the object opacity is simply ored with the black layer opacity (Rule 1), and the corresponding part of the medium-resolution black layer is recomputed from the high-resolution black layer (Rule 2).
  • the contone object obscures the black layer, even if not fully opaquely, the affected black layer pixels are pushed from the black layer to the contone layer, i.e. composited with the contone layer (Rule 3) and removed from the black layer (Rule 4 and Rule 5). The contone object is then composited with the contone layer (Rule 6).
  • FIG. 37 to 41 illustrate the effect on the foreground black layer and the background contone layer of compositing objects of various types onto the image represented by the two layers. In each case the state of the two layers is shown before and after the object is composited. The different resolutions of the foreground and background layers are indicated by the layers' different pixel grid densities.
  • the output image represented to the two layers is shown without a pixel grid, since the actual rendering of the image is not the focus of discussion here.
  • the medium-resolution foreground black layer is not illustrated, but is implicitly present. Whenever Rule 1 is applied to the high-resolution foreground black layer. Rule 2 is implicitly applied to the medium-resolution foreground black layer. Whenever Rule 4 is applied. Rule 5 is also implicitly applied.
  • Figure 37 illustrates the effect of compositing a black object 270 onto a white image.
  • the black object is simply composited into the foreground black layer 271 (Rule 1).
  • the background contone layer 272 is unaffected, and the output image 273 is the black object.
  • Figure 38 illustrates the effect of compositing a contone object 280 onto a white image.
  • the contone object 280 is simply composited into the background contone layer 282 (Rule 6).
  • the foreground black layer 281 is unaffected, and the output image 283 is the contone object.
  • Figure 39 illustrates the effect of compositing a black object 290 onto an image already containing a contone object 292. Again the black object is simply composited into the foreground black layer 291 (Rule 1). The background contone layer is unaffected, and the output image 293 has the black object 290 over the contone object 292.
  • Figure 40 illustrates the effect of compositing an opaque contone object 300 onto an image already containing a black object 301. Since the contone object obscures part of the existing black object, the affected parts of the existing bi-level object are removed from the foreground black layer 302
  • Figure 41 illustrates the effect of compositing a partially transparent contone object 310 onto an image already containing a black object 311.
  • the affected parts of the black object are composited into the contone layer 312 (Rule 3). and are then removed from the foreground black layer 313 (Rule 4). The contone object is then composited into the background contone layer as usual 314 (Rule 6).
  • the final image 315 shows darkening of those contone pixels which transparently obscure parts of the existing black object.
  • the printer driver converts the contone layer to iPrint-specific CMYK with the help of color management functions in the graphics system.
  • the printer driver then compresses and packages the black layer and the contone layer into an iPrint page description as described in Section 5.2. This page description is delivered to the printer via the standard spooler.
  • the black layer is manipulated as a set of 1-bit opacity values, but is delivered to the printer as a set of 1-bit black values. Although these two interpretations are different, they share the same representation, and so no data conversion is required.
  • a printer 320 is a graphics device, and an application 321 communicates with it via the graphics device interface 322 (GDI).
  • the printer driver graphics DLL 323 dynamic link library
  • the spooler 333 handles the delivery of pages to the printer, and may reside on a different machine to the application requesting printing. It delivers pages to the printer via a port monitor 334 which handles the physical connection to the printer.
  • the optional language monitor 335 is the part of the printer driver which imposes additional protocol on communication with the printer, and in particular decodes status responses from the printer on behalf of the spooler.
  • the printer driver user interface DLL 336 implements the user interface for editing printer-specific properties and reporting printer-specific events.
  • the structure of the Windows 9x/NT printing system is illustrated in Figure 42. Since iPrint uses USB IEEE-1284 emulation, there is no need to implement a language monitor for iPrint.
  • GDI provides functions which allow an application to draw on a device surface, i.e. typically an abstraction of a display screen or a printed page.
  • the device surface is conceptually a color bitmap.
  • the application can draw on the surface in a device-independent way, i.e. independently of the resolution and color characteristics of the device.
  • the application has random access to the entire device surface. This means that if a memory-limited printer device requires banded output, then GDI must buffer the entire page's GDI commands and replay them windowed into each band in turn. Although this provides the application with great flexibility, it can adversely affect performance.
  • GDI supports color management, whereby device-independent colors provided by the application are transparently translated into device- dependent colors according to a standard ICC (International Color
  • a printer driver can activate a different color profile depending, for example, on the user's selection of paper type on the driver-managed printer property sheet.
  • GDI supports line and spline outline graphics (paths), images, and text.
  • Outline graphics including outline font glyphs, can be stroked and filled with bit- mapped brush patterns.
  • Graphics and images can be geometrically transformed and composited with the contents of the device surface. While Windows 95/NT4 provides only boolean compositing operators, Windows 98/NT5 provides proper alpha-blending [9]. 9.3 Printer Driver Graphics DLL
  • a raster printer can. in theory, utilize standard printer driver components under Windows 9x/NT, and this can make the job of developing a printer driver trivial. This relies on being able to model the device surface as a single bitmap. The problem with this is that text and images must be rendered at the same resolution. This either compromises text resolution, or generates too much output data, compromising performance.
  • iPrint's approach is to render black text and images at different resolutions, to optimize the reproduction of each.
  • the printer driver is therefore implemented according to the generic design described in Section 8.
  • the driver therefore maintains a two-layer three-part page buffer as described in Section 8.2, and this means that the printer driver must take over managing the device surface, which in turn means that it must mediate all GDI access to the device surface.
  • the printer driver must support a number of standard functions, including the following:
  • DrvEnablePDEV indicates to GDI, via the flGraphicsCaps member of the returned DEVINFO structure, the graphics rendering capabilities of the driver. This is discussed further below.
  • DrvEnableSurface creates a device surface consisting of two conceptual layers and three parts: the 267 ppi contone layer 24-bit RGB color, the 267 ppi black layer 8-bit opacity, and the 800 dpi black layer 1-bit opacity.
  • the virtual device surface which encapsulates these two layers has a nominal resolution of 267 ppi, so this is the resolution at which GDI operations take place.
  • the printer driver is obliged to hook the aforementioned functions, it can punt function calls which apply to the contone layer back to the corresponding GDI implementations of the functions, since the contone layer is a standard-format bitmap. For every DrvXxx function there is a corresponding EngXxx function provided by GDI.
  • the first step is to avoid the complexity of Bezier-spline curve segments and geometric-wide lines altogether by clearing the corresponding capability flags (GCAPS_BEZIERS and GCAPS_GEOMETRICWIDE) in the flGraphicsCaps member of the driver's DEVINFO structure.
  • This causes GDI to reformulate such calls as sets of simpler calls to DrvPaint.
  • GDI gives a driver the opportunity to accelerate high-level capabilities, but simulates any capabilities not provided by the driver.
  • LINEATTRS line attributes
  • the styling array specifies how the line alternates between being opaque and transparent along its length, and so supports various dashed line effects etc.
  • straight lines can also usefully be rendered to the black layer, though with the increased width implied by the 800 dpi resolution.
  • DrvTextOut If punting a DrvTextOut call is not allowed (the documentation is ambiguous), then the driver should disallow complex text operations. This includes disallowing outline stroking (by clearing the
  • the driver determines the geometry of each glyph by obtaining its outline
  • the driver then renders each glyph from its outline at 800 dpi and writes it to the black layer.
  • the outline geometry uses device coordinates (i.e. at 267 ppi), the coordinates are in fixed point format with plenty of fractional precision for higher-resolution rendering. Note that strikethrough and underline rectangles are added to the glyph geometry, if specified.
  • the driver must set the GCAPS_HIGHRESTEXT flag in the DEVINFO to request that glyph positions (again in 267 ppi device coordinates) be supplied by GDI in high-precision fixed-point format, to allow accurate positioning at 800 dpi.
  • the driver must also provide an implementation of the DrvGetGlyphMode function, so that it can indicate to GDI that glyphs should be cached as outlines rather than bitmaps. Ideally the driver should cache rendered glyph bitmaps for efficiency, memory allowing. Only glyphs below a certain point size should be cached.
  • the contone layer is compressed using JPEG.
  • the forward discrete cosine transform (DCT) is the costliest part of JPEG compression.
  • DCT discrete cosine transform

Abstract

This invention concerns a printer driver for a high performance color printer, such as a printer using a page-width drop-on-demand inkjet printhead. In another aspect it concerns a method of printing. The printer driver manages a two layer page buffer into which image objects are composited during page construction. The first layer contains contone data while the second layer contains bi-level data. The bi-level data is composited over the contone data by the printer. The printer driver operates such that where there is contone data composited with the contone layer that obscures bi-level data, the obscured bi-level data is removed from the bi-level layer and either discarded, or in the case where there is some interaction between the image represented by the obscuring contone data and the image represented by the obscured bi-level data, then the bi-level data is composited with the contone data before the obscuring contone data is composited with the contone layer.

Description

"Printer and methods of operation"
TECHNICAL FIELD This invention concerns a printer driver for a high performance color printer, such as a printer using a page-width drop-on-demand inkjet printhead. In another aspect it concerns a method of printing.
The present invention relates to a modular printhead for a color printer. In further aspects the invention concerns methods of printing and loading using the printhead.
The present invention relates to a modular printhead for a color printer. In further aspects the invention concerns methods of printing and loading using the printhead.
This invention concerns high performance color printers which typically use page-width drop-on-demand inkjet printheads. In particular it concerns a halftoner/compositor unit for digitally halftoning a contone color layer to bi-level. and compositing a black layer over the halftoned contone layer. In another aspect it concerns a method of halftoning and compositing. This invention concerns a dither unit for halftoning a contone color image in the form of an array of contone color pixel values, to bi-level dots.
In another aspect the invention concerns a method of operating the dither unit.
This invention concerns pre-heat cycle for a printhead. The invention has utility, for instance, in a high-performance color printer using drop-on- demand inkjet printheads.
This invention concerns a resource held in computer memory and multiple parallel processors which require simultaneous access to the resource. The resource may be a dither matrix or dither volume used for digitally halftoning a contone color image, in the form of an array of contone color pixel values, to bi-level dots, and this may be required to be accessed by different thresholding units in parallel. In another aspect the invention is a method of accessing such a resource.
This invention concerns a printer system and method for predicting when an ink reservoir for a printer will run out of ink. The printer may, for instance, use drop-on-demand inkjet printheads.
This invention concerns the control of firing pulse duration in a printhead. for a printer, such as a high performance color printer. The invention, in particular concerns a control system and a method. The printer may use. for instance, a pagewidth drop-on-demand inkjet printhead.
BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION A general 256-level dither volume provides great flexibility in dither cell design, by decoupling different intensity levels. It provides an extra degree of freedom over a dither matrix when designing an optimal stochastic dither [12] . General dither volumes can be large - a 64x64x256 dither volume, for example, has a size of 128KB. They can also be inefficient to access since each color component can require the retrieval of a different bit from the volume.
In a drop-on-demand inkjet printhead, the size of a printed dot varies according to the ink temperature. When energy is used to eject a drop of ink. the ink temperature rises. When a drop of ink is actually ejected, it carries some of the ink temperature away with it. Over the course of ejecting multiple drops, an equilibrium temperature is reached. The printing process has a strong tendency to stay at the equilibrium temperature once it is reached.
The invention is a printer equipped with a printhead controller for a printhead of the type including a temperature sensor to produce a signal indicative of the temperature of the printhead, and a plurality of nozzles each of which has an ink supply port to receive ink from a reservoir, an ink deposition port to eject ink dots, and a firing control port to receive signals to cause deposition of an ink dot from the deposition port during a firing cycle of the printhead. Where, the printhead controller includes means to receive the signal indicative of the temperature of the printhead from the temperature sensor, and means to supply a firing signal to the firing control ports of the nozzles, and the printhead controller is operable, before each print job, to set all the nozzles to fire, and to execute a series of modified firing cycles to provide a series of short firing pulses to each nozzle, the duration of each pulse being insufficient to fire the drops, but enough to heat up the ink, until the signal indicative of the temperature of the printhead indicates that it has reached its operating equilibrium temperature.
Feedback during the Preheat mode may be provided by Tsense (defined below), and continues until a temperature about 30° C above ambient is reached. It is important to have temperature information fed back about when the equilibrium temperature is reached, since the time or temperature may vary depending on the ink composition.
In one example, about 200 pulses for each nozzle are required. The duration of the Preheat mode may be around 50 milliseconds, and depends on the ink composition.
Preheat does not affect performance as it is done while the data is being transferred to the printer.
The Preheat cycle involves a single Load Cycle to all nozzles with Is (i.e. setting all nozzles to fire), and a number of short firing pulses to each nozzle. The duration of the pulse must be insufficient to fire the drops, but enough to heat up the ink. The duration of the pulse may vary for each of the inks used in the printer. Altogether about 200 pulses for each nozzle are required, cycling through in the same sequence as a standard Print Cycle.
Where multiple parallel processors require simultaneous access to a resource held in computer memory, several strategies are possible. First, the processors could take turns to access the resource, however this reduces the performance of the processors. Second, multi-ported memory could be employed, and third, the entire resource could be replicated in different memory banks; both the last options are expensive.
A particular example of a resource held in computer memory is a dither matrix or dither volume used for digitally halftoning a contone color image. When dither cell registration is not desired between different color planes of the image, a set thresholding units handling the dithering of individual color components may require simultaneous access to a different dither cell locations.
The duration of firing pulses to a printhead depend on the viscosity of the ink. which is dependant on temperature and ink characteristics and the amount of power available to the printhead. A typical pulse duration range is
1.3 to 1.8 ms.
SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The invention is a printer driver for a high performance printer, where the printer driver manages a two layer page buffer representing a page to be printed. The first layer of the buffer contains background contone data, while the second layer contains foreground bi-level data. The printer driver transmits the buffer to the printer on completion of the page, and the printer composits the two layers after halftoning the contone layer. The printer driver operates such that when it determines that contone data being composited with the contone layer obscures data in the bi-level layer, the obscured bi-level data is removed from the bi-level layer and either discarded, or in the case where there is some interaction between the image represented by the obscuring contone data and the image represented by the obscured bi-level data then the obscured bi-level data is composited with the contone layer before the obscuring contone data is composited with the contone layer.
The contone data may have a lower resolution than the bi-level data. The two layer page buffer may be augmented with a third layer of contone data, where the third layer contains a contone version of the bi-level data of the second layer subsampled at the resolution of the first layer, and where the printer driver operates such that when it determines that contone data being composited with the first layer obscures contone data in the third layer, the obscured contone data is removed from the third layer and is composited with the contone layer before the obscuring contone data is composited with the contone layer, and the bi-level data in the second layer which corresponds to the obscured contone data in the third layer is removed from the second layer
Interaction will typically occur between an image represented by the obscuring contone data and obscured bi-level data where the contone data represents a non-opaque image object.
The contone data will typically be color data, whereas the bi-level data will usually be black data; although it might be another color. Additional layers may be provided to accommodate additional foreground bi-level layers of additional colors.
The printer driver will usually be closely coupled with a host graphics system, so that the printer driver can provide device-specific handling for different graphics and imaging operations, in particular compositing operations and text operations.
The host will provide support for color management, so that device- independent color can be converted to printer-specific color in a standard way. The page description sent to the printer generally contains device- specific color.
The host graphics system renders images and graphics to a nominal resolution specified by the printer driver, but it allows the printer driver to take control of rendering text. In particular, the graphics system provides sufficient information to the printer driver to allow it to render and position text at a higher resolution than the nominal device resolution. The host graphics system requires random access to a contone page buffer at the nominal device resolution, into which it composites graphics and imaging objects, but that it allows the printer driver to take control of the actual compositing in that it expects the printer driver to manage the page buffer.
The printer's page description may contains a 267 ppi contone layer and an 800 dpi black layer. The printer driver may specify a nominal page resolution of 267 ppi to the graphics system. Where possible the printer driver relies on the graphics system to render image and graphics objects to the pixel level at 267 ppi, with the exception of black text. The printer driver fields all text rendering requests, detects and renders black text at 800 dpi, but returns non-black text rendering requests to the graphics system for rendering at 267 ppi.
The following rules may be implemented by the printer driver: When a black object is composited with the page buffer it is composited with the bi-level black layer. The black layer is updated by simply oring the object opacity with the black layer opacity, and the corresponding part of the medium-resolution contone black layer is recomputed from the high-resolution black layer. When a contone color object is composited with the page buffer it is composited with the contone layer. The contone layer and the black layer are updated as follows:
Wherever the contone object obscures the black layer, even if not fully opaquely, the affected black layer pixels are pushed from the black layer to the contone layer, i.e. composited with the contone layer and removed from the black layer. The contone object is then composited with the contone layer.
If a contone object pixel' is fully opaque, then there is no need to push the corresponding black pixels into the background contone layer, since the background contone pixel will subsequently be completely obliterated by the foreground contone pixel.
The bi-level black layer data may be transmitted to the printer in compressed form. Group 4 facsimile coding may be used for this purpose, but it is better if the modified Huffman coding of horizontal run lengths is removed, or tuned for higher resolutions. Alternatively EDRL compression may be used.
The contone layer data may also be transmitted to the printer in compressed form. JPEG or wavelet compression may be used for this purpose. In another aspect the invention is a method of operating a printer driver for a high performance printer, where the printer driver manages a two layer page buffer; the first layer is for contone data, the second layer is for bi- level data where the bi-level data will be composited with the contone data by the printer: the method comprising the steps of: determining when contone data being composited with the contone layer obscures data in the bi-level layer, removing obscured bi-level data from the bi-level layer, and either discarding it. or in the case where there is some interaction between the image represented by the obscuring contone data and the image represented by the obscured bi-level data compositing the obscured bi-level data with the contone layer before compositing the contone data with the contone layer.
The invention is a modular printhead for a color printer, including a plurality of nozzles each of which has an ink supply port, an ink deposition port and a firing control port to receive signals to cause deposition of an ink dot from the deposition port (firing) during a firing cycle of the printhead. The nozzles of the printhead are arranged in groups, or pods, with the ink supply ports of the nozzles of each pod connected to a common ink supply line. The nozzles of each pod are arranged in rows (the rows extend in the direction across the page to be printed), and the rows of nozzles are offset from each other so that the nozzles of each row deposit dots onto different lines if fired simultaneously. Pods of each different color are arranged together into operating groups in which selected mutually exclusive sub-groups of nozzles have their firing control ports gated to enable them to be fired simultaneously at predetermined phases of a firing cycle. In one example there are two rows of nozzles in each pod and the nozzles of one row deposit the even dots along one line on the page, and the nozzles of the other row deposit the odd dots along the adjacent line on the page.
The amount of offset between the rows of nozzles is designed to match the flow of paper under the nozzles.
The nozzles of each pod may be fired in order, along a first row starting from a first side, and then along the other row in the same direction ending at the other side.
A single pod may consist of ten nozzles sharing a common ink reservoir. Five nozzles are in one row, and five are in another. Each nozzle may produce dots 22.5mm in diameter spaced on a 15.875mm grid.
One pod of each different color may be grouped together to form a chromapod in which the pods of different colors are arranged so that the dots printed by the nozzles of one color will be for different lines than those printed by the other colors at the same time, but that each pod of the chromapod will print the same group of dots in turn.
One pod of cyan, magenta, yellow and black, may be grouped into a chromapod. A chromapod represents different color components of the same horizontal set of ten dots on different lines. The exact distance between different color pods is a constant number of dot-widths, and must therefore be taken into account when printing: The printing algorithm must allow for a variable distance of dot- widths between colors.
One or more chromapod's may be formed into phasegroup in which groups of nozzles in enabled podgroups are fired simultaneously during a given firing phase. One or more of the podgroups of a phasegroup are enabled at the same time, depending of the speed of printing required.
Five chromapods may be organised into a single podgroup. Since each chromapod may contain 40 nozzles, each podgroup may contain 200 nozzles: 50 cyan. 50 magenta. 50 yellow, and 50 black nozzles.
Two podgroups may be organised into a single phasegroup. The phasegroup is so named because groups of nozzles within a phasegroup are fired simultaneously during a given firing phase. The formation of a phasegroup from two podgroups allows both low-speed and high-speed printing via two PodgroupEnable lines.
Two phasegroups may be organised into a single firegroup, with four firegroups in each segment. Firegroups are so named because they all fire the same nozzles simultaneously. Two enable lines allow the firing of the Phasegroups' nozzles independently as different firing phases. A 4-inch printhead will typically be made up of eight segments side by side, and each segment will have four firegroups.
A wider printhead may be made by assembling two of the printheads together. So an 8-inch printhead consists of two 4-inch printheads for a total of 51.200 nozzles. The nozzle hierarchy allow overlapping phases and multiple speeds while maintaining even power consumption. In addition, the nozzle groupings pods provide physical stability.
In terms of power consumption, the nozzle groupings enable a low- speed and a high-speed printing mode to allow speed/power consumption trade-offs to be made in different product configurations.
A single 4-inch printhead may contain a total of 25,600 nozzles. A Print Cycle involves the firing of up to all of these nozzles, dependent on the information to be printed. To fire them all at once would consume too much power and be problematic in terms of ink refill and nozzle interference. Further, the firing of a nozzle also causes acoustic perturbations for a limited time within the common ink reservoir of that nozzle's pod. The perturbations can interfere with the firing of another nozzle within the same pod. Consequently, the firing of nozzles within a pod should be offset from each other as long as possible. To address this, one nozzle per color may be fired from a chromapod and then a nozzle from the next chromapod within the podgroup may be fired.
Two firing modes may be defined: a low-speed printing mode and a high-speed printing mode: During low-speed printing, only one Podgroup of each phasegroup is given firing pulse, so only one podgroup of the two fires nozzles. In the low- speed printing mode the chromapods within both podgroups must all fire before the first chromapod fires again.
In the low-speed printing mode, 128 nozzles may be fired simultaneously from each 4-inch printhead. The fired nozzles should be maximally distant, so 16 nozzles are fired from each of the eight segments. To fire all 25.600 nozzles. 200 different sets of 128 nozzles must be fired.
During high-speed printing, both Podgroups are set, so both podgroups fire nozzles. In the high-speed printing mode the chromapods within a single podgroups must all fire before the first chromapod fires again.
In the high-speed printing mode. 256 nozzles may be fired simultaneously from each 4-inch printhead. The fired nozzles should be maximally distant, so 32 nozzles are fired from each segment. To fire all 25.600 nozzles. 100 different sets of 256 nozzles must be fired. Consequently a low-speed print takes twice as long as a high-speed print, since the high-speed print fires twice as many nozzles at once. The power consumption in the low-speed mode is half that of the high-speed mode. Note, however, that the energy consumed to print a page is the same in both cases. The printhead produces several lines of feedback to adjust the timing of the firing pulses. One feedback signal informs the controller how hot the printhead is. This allows the controller to adjust timing of firing pulses, since temperature affects the viscosity of the ink. A second feedback signal informs the controller how much voltage is available to the actuator.
This allows the controller to compensate for a flat battery or high voltage source by adjusting the pulse width. A third feedback signal informs the controller of the resistivity (Ohms per square) of the actuator heater. This allows the controller to adjust the pulse widths to maintain a constant energy irrespective of the heater resistivity. A fourth feedback signal informs the controller of the width of the critical part of the heater, which may vary up to ± 5% due to lithographic and etching variations. This allows the controller to adjust the pulse width appropriately.
A Load Cycle involves the loading up of the printhead with the information to be printed during the subsequent Print Cycle. The firing control port of each nozzle may have an associated NozzleEnable bit that determines whether or not the nozzle will fire during a Print Cycle. The NozzleEnable bits are loaded during the load cycle via a set of shift registers. Once all the shift registers have been fully loaded, all of the bits are transferred in parallel to the appropriate NozzleEnable bits. Once the transfer has taken place, the Print Cycle can begin. The Print Cycle and the Load Cycle can occur simultaneously as long as the parallel load of all NozzleEnable bits occurs at the end of the Print Cycle.
The printing process must produce data in the correct sequence for the printhead. As an example, a first Clock pulse may transfer the CMYK bits for the next Print Cycle's dot 0, 800, 1600. 2400. 3200. 4000. 4800. and 5600. The second Clock pulse may transfer the CMYK bits for the next Print Cycle's dot 1, 801, 1601. 2401, 3201. 4001; 4801 and 5601. After 800 SRClock pulses, the Transfer pulse can be given. Of course, within the 800 SRClock pulses, the shift registers must be loaded according to the correspondence with the final transfer to the NozzleEnable bits, and here a number of different wiring possibilities exist. One loading (and hence wiring) possibility is to load the bits in pod order, and within each pod the bits representing each nozzle from one side of the pod to the other (effectively loading the first nozzle from the first row through to the last row before moving on to the second nozzle in the first row). In a 2 row pod this means loading the nozzles in an apparant zig-zag fashion. Another possibility is to load the bits in pod order, and within each pod the bits representing each row. and within each row starting from the nozzle from one side of the pod to the other.
It is important to note that the odd and even CMYK outputs, although printed during the same Print Cycle, do not appear on the same physical output line. The physical separation of odd and even nozzles within the printhead, as well as separation between nozzles of different colors ensures that they will produce dots on different lines of the page. This relative difference must be accounted for when loading the data into the printhead. The actual difference in lines depends on the characteristics of the inkjet mechanism used in the printhead. The differences can be defined by variables representing the distance between nozzles of different colors, and the distance between nozzles of the same color.
The invention is a modular printhead for a color printer, including a plurality of nozzles each of which has an ink supply port, an ink deposition port and a firing control port to receive signals to cause deposition of an ink dot from the deposition port (firing) during a firing cycle of the printhead.
The nozzles of the printhead are arranged in groups, or pods, with the ink supply ports of the nozzles of each pod connected to a common ink supply line. The nozzles of each pod are arranged in rows (the rows extend in the direction across the page to be printed), and the rows of nozzles are offset from each other so that the nozzles of each row deposit dots onto different lines if fired simultaneously. Pods of each different color are arranged together into operating groups in which selected mutually exclusive subgroups of nozzles have their firing control ports gated to enable them to be fired simultaneously at predetermined phases of a firing cycle. In one example there are two rows of nozzles in each pod and the nozzles of one row deposit the even dots along one line on the page, and the nozzles of the other row deposit the odd dots along the adjacent line on the page.
The amount of offset between the rows of nozzles is designed to match the flow of paper under the nozzles.
The nozzles of each pod may be fired in order, along a first row starting from a first side, and then along the other row in the same direction ending at the other side.
A single pod may consist of ten nozzles sharing a common ink reservoir. Five nozzles are in one row, and five are in another. Each nozzle may produce dots 22.5mm in diameter spaced on a 15.875mm grid.
One pod of each different color may be grouped together to form a chromapod in which the pods of different colors are arranged so that the dots printed by the nozzles of one color will be for different lines than those printed by the other colors at the same time, but that each pod of the chromapod will print the same group of dots in turn.
One pod of cyan, magenta, yellow and black, may be grouped into a chromapod. A chromapod represents different color components of the same horizontal set of ten dots on different lines. The exact distance between different color pods is a constant number of dot-widths, and must therefore be taken into account when printing: The printing algorithm must allow for a variable distance of dot- widths between colors.
One or more chromapods may be formed into phasegroup in which groups of nozzles in enabled podgroups are fired simultaneously during a given firing phase. One or more of the podgroups of a phasegroup are enabled at the same time, depending of the speed of printing required.
Five chromapods may be organised into a single podgroup. Since each chromapod may contain 40 nozzles, each podgroup may contain 200 nozzles: 50 cyan. 50 magenta, 50 yellow, and 50 black nozzles.
Two podgroups may be organised into a single phasegroup. The phasegroup is so named because groups of nozzles within a phasegroup are fired simultaneously during a given firing phase. The formation of a phasegroup from two podgroups allows both low-speed and high-speed printing via two PodgroupEnable lines.
Two phasegroups may be organised into a single firegroup, with four firegroups in each segment. Firegroups are so named because they all fire the same nozzles simultaneously. Two enable lines allow the firing of the Phasegroups' nozzles independently as different firing phases. A 4-inch printhead will typically be made up of eight segments side by side, and each segment will have four firegroups.
A wider printhead may be made by assembling two of the printheads together. So an 8-inch printhead consists of two 4-inch printheads for a total of 51.200 nozzles. The nozzle hierarchy allow overlapping phases and multiple speeds while maintaining even power consumption. In addition, the nozzle groupings pods provide physical stability.
In terms of power consumption, the nozzle groupings enable a low- speed and a high-speed printing mode to allow speed/power consumption trade-offs to be made in different product configurations.
A single 4-inch printhead may contain a total of 25,600 nozzles. A Print Cycle involves the firing of up to all of these nozzles, dependent on the information to be printed. To fire them all at once would consume too much power and be problematic in terms of ink refill and nozzle interference. Further, the firing of a nozzle also causes acoustic perturbations for a limited time within the common ink reservoir of that nozzle's pod. The perturbations can interfere with the firing of another nozzle within the same pod. Consequently, the firing of nozzles within a pod should be offset from each other as long as possible. To address this, one nozzle per color may be fired from a chromapod and then a nozzle from the next chromapod within the podgroup may be fired.
Two firing modes may be defined: a low-speed printing mode and a high-speed printing mode: During low-speed printing, only one Podgroup of each phasegroup is given firing pulse, so only one podgroup of the two fires nozzles. In the low- speed printing mode the chromapods within both podgroups must all fire before the first chromapod fires again.
In the low-speed printing mode, 128 nozzles may be fired simultaneously from each 4-inch printhead. The fired nozzles should be maximally distant, so 16 nozzles are fired from each of the eight segments. To fire all 25.600 nozzles, 200 different sets of 128 nozzles must be fired.
During high-speed printing, both Podgroups are set. so both podgroups fire nozzles. In the high-speed printing mode the chromapods within a single podgroups must all fire before the first chromapod fires again.
In the high-speed printing mode, 256 nozzles may be fired simultaneously from each 4-inch printhead. The fired nozzles should be maximally distant, so 32 nozzles are fired from each segment. To fire all 25,600 nozzles. 100 different sets of 256 nozzles must be fired. Consequently a low-speed print takes twice as long as a high-speed print, since the high-speed print fires twice as many nozzles at once. The power consumption in the low-speed mode is half that of the high-speed mode. Note, however, that the energy consumed to print a page is the same in both cases. The printhead produces several lines of feedback to adjust the timing of the firing pulses. One feedback signal informs the controller how hot the printhead is. This allows the controller to adjust timing of firing pulses, since temperature affects the viscosity of the ink. A second feedback signal informs the controller how much voltage is available to the actuator.
This allows the controller to compensate for a flat battery or high voltage source by adjusting the pulse width. A third feedback signal informs the controller of the resistivity (Ohms per square) of the actuator heater. This allows the controller to adjust the pulse widths to maintain a constant energy irrespective of the heater resistivity. A fourth feedback signal informs the controller of the width of the critical part of the heater, which may vary up to ± 5% due to lithographic and etching variations. This allows the controller to adjust the pulse width appropriately.
A Load Cycle involves the loading up of the printhead with the information to be printed during the subsequent Print Cycle. The firing control port of each nozzle may have an associated NozzleEnable bit that determines whether or not the nozzle will fire during a Print Cycle. The NozzleEnable bits are loaded during the load cycle via a set of shift registers. Once all the shift registers have been fully loaded, all of the bits are transferred in parallel to the appropriate NozzleEnable bits. Once the transfer has taken place, the Print Cycle can begin. The Print Cycle and the Load Cycle can occur simultaneously as long as the parallel load of all NozzleEnable bits occurs at the end of the Print Cycle.
The printing process must produce data in the correct sequence for the printhead. As an example, a first Clock pulse may transfer the CMYK bits for the next Print Cycle's dot 0. 800. 1600, 2400. 3200, 4000, 4800, and 5600. The second Clock pulse may transfer the CMYK bits for the next Print Cycle's dot 1. 801. 1601, 2401, 3201. 400i; 4801 and 5601. After 800 SRClock pulses, the Transfer pulse can be given. Of course, within the 800 SRClock pulses, the shift registers must be loaded according to the correspondence with the final transfer to the NozzleEnable bits, and here a number of different wiring possibilities exist. One loading (and hence wiring) possibility is to load the bits in pod order, and within each pod the bits representing each nozzle from one side of the pod to the other (effectively loading the first nozzle from the first row through to the last row before moving on to the second nozzle in the first row). In a 2 row pod this means loading the nozzles in an apparant zig-zag fashion. Another possibility is to load the bits in pod order, and within each pod the bits representing each row. and within each row starting from the nozzle from one side of the pod to the other.
It is important to note that the odd and even CMYK outputs, although printed during the same Print Cycle, do not appear on the same physical output line. The physical separation of odd and even nozzles within the printhead, as well as separation between nozzles of different colors ensures that they will produce dots on different lines of the page. This relative difference must be accounted for when loading the data into the printhead. The actual difference in lines depends on the characteristics of the inkjet mechanism used in the printhead. The differences can be defined by variables representing the distance between nozzles of different colors, and the distance between nozzles of the same color.
The invention is a halftoner/compositor unit for halftoning a contone color layer to bi-level. and compositing a black layer over the halftoned contone layer, comprising: An input port to receive an expanded contone color layer in the form of a series of contone color pixel values, and an expanded black layer in the form of a series of black dot values.
A dither unit to dither each contone color pixel value received at the input port and determine the value of a bi-level output dot for each color component. A composite unit to receive the values of the bi-level output dots from the dither unit and the black dot values from the input port, and to composite the black layer over the halftoned layer, for instance, such that when the value of a black dot represents full opacity, then the values of the halftoned dots for each color are set to represent no color.
A clock enable generator to generate enable signals for clocking the contone color pixel input, the black dot input, and the dot output.
An output port to deliver a set of bi-level image lines in the form of a series of bi-level dots, which may have the color planes separated. The output may be a set of 1600 dpi bi-level image lines.
The color contone layer may be a CMYK contone layer. An input contone CMYK FIFO may include a full 8KB line buffer. Each line is read once and then used contone scale factor times to effect vertical up-scaling via line replication. FIFO write address wrapping is disabled until the start of the final replicated use of the line, at which time the clock enable generator generates a contone line advance enable signal which enables wrapping.
An alternative is to read the line from main memory contone scale factor times, increasing memory traffic by 65MB/s, but avoiding the need for the on-chip 8KB line buffer.
The consumer of the data produced by the unit is typically a printhead interface. The printhead interface may not only require bi-level image data in planar format, i.e. with the color planes separated. But, it may also require that even and odd pixels are separated. When the color contone layer is a CMYK contone layer the output stage of the unit may use 8 parallel pixel
FIFOs, one each for even cyan, odd cyan, even magenta, odd magenta, even yellow, odd yellow, even black, and odd black.
For this purpose the clock enable generator may also generate an even signal which is used to select the even or odd set of output dot FIFOs. Once started, the unit may proceed until it detects an end-of-page condition, or until it is explicitly stopped via its control register.
The unit generates a page of dots of a specified width and length and a number of registers may be employed to provide data to control the page structure and parameters.
A page width register to receive page width data which may correspond to the width of the printhead.
A page length register to receive page length data which may correspond to the length of the target page. A left margin register to receive data describing the position of the left margin.
A right margin register to receive data describing the position of the right margin.
The distance from the left margin to the right margin corresponds to the target page width. The halftoner/compositor unit generates target page data between specified left and right margins relative to the page width.
A black page width register to receive data describing the black page width.
A contone page width register to receive data describing the contone page width.
The halftoner/compositor unit consumes black and contone data according to specified black and contone page widths.
The halftoner/compositor unit clips black and contone data to the target page width. This allows the black and contone page widths to exceed the target page width without requiring any special end-of-line logic at the input FIFO level.
For this purpose the clock enable generator may also generate a. margin signal which is used to generate white dots when the current dot position is in the left or right margin of the page. The halftoner/compositor unit scales contone data to printer resolution both horizontally and vertically based on a specified scale factor. A contone scale factor register may be provided to receive a contone scale factor. This scale factor must be written to the contone scale factor register prior to starting the halftoner/compositor unit.
The halftoner/compositor control and configuration registers may be summarised according to the following table:
Figure imgf000022_0001
In the dither cell each dot column of the volume can be implemented as 256 separate bits.
Alternatively, each dot column of the volume can be implemented as a fixed set of thresholds. Using three 8-bit thresholds, for example, only consumes 24 bits. Now. n thresholds define 2 + 1 intensitv intervals, within which the corresponding dither cell location is alternately not set or set. The contone pixel value being dithered uniquely selects one of the n + 1 intervals, and this determines the value of the corresponding output dot.
The contone data may be dithered using a triple-threshold 64x64x 3x8-bit (12KB) dither volume. The three thresholds form a convenient 24-bit value which can be retrieved from the dither cell ROM in one cycle.
If dither cell registration is desired between color planes, then the same triple-threshold value can be retrieved once and used to dither each color component.
If dither cell registration is not desired, then the dither cell can be split into four subcells and stored in four separately addressable ROMs from which four different triple-threshold values can be retrieved in parallel in one cycle. Four color planes share the same dither cell at vertical and/or horizontal offsets of 32 dots from each other.
A multi-threshold dither unit may be used. For example, a triple- threshold unit converts a triple-threshold value and an intensity value into an interval and thence a one or zero bit. The triple-thresholding rules are shown in the following Table.
Figure imgf000023_0001
The composite unit composites a black layer dot over a halftoned CMYK layer dot. If the black layer opacity is one, then the halftoned CMY is set to zero. Given a 4-bit halftoned color CcMcYcK,. and a 1-bit black layer opacity K , the composite logic is as defined in the following Table:
Figure imgf000024_0001
The clock enable generator uses a set of counters. The internal logic of the counters is defined in the following Table:
Figure imgf000025_0001
The logic of the clock enable signals is defined in the following Table:
Figure imgf000026_0001
The invention is a dither unit for digitally halftoning a contone color image, in the form of an array of contone color pixel values, to bi-level dots.
The dither unit comprises a dither volume which contains, for each dither cell location, a fixed set of n thresholds which define n + 1 intensity intervals within which the dither cell location is defined to be alternately not set and set. Such a dither unit may operate to dither each contone color pixel value received at the input port by determining the value of a bi-level output dot for each color component by looking up the dither volume.
A set of thresholds can be used to effectively runlength-encode a bit column of a dither volume, i.e. to compress a bit column. This relies on the fact that there is typically coherence between adjacent bits in the column.
When the number of thresholds is limited or fixed, then a general dither volume can no longer necessarily be represented, and so the limited number of thresholds needs to be respected when the dither volume is created. When the number of thresholds is limited to one. a traditional dither matrix is obtained.
A multi-threshold unit may be provided for each color component of the image. All the multi-threshold units are operatively coupled to the dither volume, and each multi-threshold unit determines the value of an output dot corresponding to a contone color pixel component value by determining whether the dither cell location corresponding to the location of the output dot is defined to be set within the intensity interval which the contone value uniquely selects. Three thresholds may be used, and they may be 8-bit thresholds.
If dither cell registration is desired between color planes, then a multi- threshold value may be retrieved once and used to dither each color component.
If dither cell registration is not desired between color planes, then the dither cell may be split into subcells and stored in separately addressable memories from which different multi-threshold values can be retrieved in parallel.
Where a four color component contone layer is to be halftoned, four separate triple-threshold units may each receive a series of contone color pixel values for respective color components, and a dither cell address generator may operate in conjunction with four four- way multiplexors, for respective triple-threshold units, to control the retrieval of four different triple-threshold values from subcells of the dither unit.
The triple-threshold units may convert triple-threshold values T1( T2 and T3 and an intensity value V into an interval and thence a one or zero bit according to the rules shown in the following Table:
Figure imgf000027_0001
Figure imgf000028_0001
In a further aspect the invention is, in a dither unit for digitally halftoning an contone color image, in the form of an array of contone color pixel values, to bi-level dots, where said dither unit comprises a dither volume, a halftoning method comprising the following steps: representing each dither cell location of said dither volume by a fixed set of n thresholds which define n + 1 intensity intervals within which said dither cell location is defined to be alternately not set and set; and using the value of the contone pixel component being dithered to uniquely select one of said n + 1 intensity intervals, to determine the value of the output dot corresponding to said contone pixel component value.
Where the dither unit further comprises, for each color component of the image, a multi-threshold unit, all of which multi-threshold units being operatively coupled to the dither volume; and the method further comprises the following step: determining in each said multi-threshold unit the value of an output dot corresponding to a contone color pixel component value by determining whether the dither cell location corresponding to the location of said output dot is defined to be set within the intensity interval which said contone value uniquely selects.
The invention is a printer equipped with a printhead controller for a printhead of the type including a temperature sensor to produce a signal indicative of the temperature of the printhead, and a plurality of nozzles each of which has an ink supply port to receive ink from a reservoir, an ink deposition port to eject ink dots, and a firing control port to receive signals to cause deposition of an ink dot from the deposition port during a firing cycle of the printhead. Where, the printhead controller includes means to receive the signal indicative of the temperature of the printhead from the temperature sensor, and means to supply a firing signal to the firing control ports of the nozzles, and the printhead controller is operable, before each print job, to set all the nozzles to fire, and to execute a series of modified firing cycles to provide a series of short firing pulses to each nozzle, the duration of each pulse being insufficient to fire the drops, but enough to heat up the ink. until the signal indicative of the temperature of the printhead indicates that it has reached its operating equilibrium temperature. Feedback during the Preheat mode may be provided by Tsense (defined below), and continues until a temperature about 30° C above ambient is reached. It is important to have temperature information fed back about when the equilibrium temperature is reached, since the time or temperature may vary depending on the ink composition.
In one example, about 200 pulses for each nozzle are required. The duration of the Preheat mode may be around 50 milliseconds, and depends on the ink composition.
Preheat does not affect performance as it is done while the data is being transferred to the printer.
The Preheat cycle involves a single Load Cycle to all nozzles with Is (i.e. setting all nozzles to fire), and a number of short firing pulses to each nozzle. The duration of the pulse must be insufficient to fire the drops, but enough to heat up the ink. The duration of the pulse may vary for each of the inks used in the printer. Altogether about 200 pulses for each nozzle are required, cycling through in the same sequence as a standard Print Cycle. The invention is a resource held in computer memory, multiple parallel processors which require simultaneous access to the resource and a resource address generator to generate coordinates within the resource, where the resource is divided into different parts with each part being stored in different memory banks, and the resource address generator generates coordinates which are used to select the parts of the resource that are used by each processor, the selection being arranged to ensure that each part is only used by one processor at a time. The selection may also ensure that each processor uses the parts in the order in which they appear in the resource. The resource may be a multi-threshold dither matrix for digitally halftoning a contone color image, in the form of an array of contone color pixel values, to bi-level dots. Said dither matrix may comprise, for each dither cell location, a fixed set of n thresholds defining n + 1 intensity intervals within which the dither cell location is defined to be alternately not set and set. The multiple parallel processors which require simultaneous access to the resource may be multi-threshold units provided for each color component of the image. All the multi-threshold units are operatively coupled to the multi-threshold dither matrix, and each multi-threshold unit determines the value of an output dot corresponding to a contone color pixel component value by determining whether the dither cell location corresponding to the location of said output dot is defined to be set within the intensity interval which the contone value uniquely selects.
Such a dither unit may operate to dither each contone color pixel value received at the input port by determining the value of a bi-level output dot for each color component by looking up the multi-threshold dither matrix.
The dither cell may be split into subcells and stored in separately addressable memories from which different multi-threshold values are retrieved in parallel.
Where a four color component contone layer is to be halftoned, four separate triple-threshold units may each receive a series of contone color pixel values for respective color components, and a dither cell address generator operates in conjunction with four four-way multiplexors, for respective threshold units, to control the retrieval of four different triple threshold values from four different subcells of the dither matrix. The address generator is easily able to be arranged so that no two threshold units require simultaneous access to the same subcell, if dither cell registration between color panes is not desired.
In a further aspect, the invention is a method of accessing resources held in computer memory, where multiple parallel processors require simultaneous access to the resource and there is a resource address generator to generate coordinates within the resource, the method comprising the steps of: dividing the resource into different parts: storing each part in a different memory bank: and operating the resource address generator to generates coordinates which are used to select the parts of the resource that are used by each processor, the selection being arranged to ensure that each part is only used by one processor at a time. The selection may also ensure that each processor uses the parts in the order in which they appear in the resource.
The resource may be a multi-threshold dither matrix for digitally halftoning a contone color image, in the form of an array of contone color pixel values, to bi-level dots. Said dither matrix may comprise, for each dither cell location, a fixed set of n thresholds defining n + 1 intensity intervals within which the dither cell location is defined to be alternately not set and set.
The multiple parallel processors which require simultaneous access to the resource may be multi-threshold units provided for each color component of the image. All the multi-threshold units are operatively coupled to the multi-threshold dither matrix, and each multi-threshold unit determines the value of an output dot corresponding to a contone color pixel component value by determining whether the dither cell location corresponding to the location of the output dot is defined to be set within the intensity interval which said contone value uniquely selects. The dither cell may be split into subcells and stored in separately addressable memories from which different multi-threshold values are retrieved in parallel.
Where a four color component contone layer is to be halftoned, four separate triple-threshold units may each receive a series of contone color pixel values for respective color components, and a dither cell address generator operates in conjunction with four four-way multiplexors, for respective threshold units, to control the retrieval of four different triple threshold values from four different subcells of the dither matrix. The dither cell address generator may generate dither cell coordinates which reflect the current dot coordinates modulo the size of the dither cell. The low-order bits of the dither cell coordinates may be used to address a location within each dither subcell, and the high-order bits of the dither cell coordinates may be used to select which dither subcell is used by each multi- threshold unit, the selection being arranged to ensure that each subcell is only used by one multi-threshold unit at a time, and to ensure that each multi-threshold unit uses the dither subcells in the order in which they appear in the dither cell.
The invention is a printer system for use in a printer having a printhead of the type including a plurality of nozzles each of which has an ink supply port, and ink deposition port and a firing control port to receive signals to cause deposition of an ink dot from the deposition port during a firing cycle of the printhead. The printer also includes an ink reservoir (such as a cartridge) to supply ink to the ink supply ports of said nozzles, and said printer system operates to predict when said ink reservoir will run out of ink.
The printer system comprises, an input port to receive a signal indicative of the number of dots of ink printed by or to be printed by the printer, a memory in which is stored data representing the number of dots of ink remaining in said reservoir, and a processor to receive signals from said input port and to update said memory as printing takes place. The signal indicative of the number of dots of ink printed by the printer is related to the signals received at the firing control ports of said nozzles.
At the end of a predetermined number of pages, an indication whether there is enough ink remaining in the reservoir to print another page may be generated.
A new page may not be printed unless there is enough ink left. The signal indicative of the number of dots printed or to be printed may be derived from a controller for the printhead. the printhead itself, or the ink reservoir. A dot counter may maintain a count of the number of dots of ink fired from the printhead. The dot count may be periodically cleared. The dot counter may have an input port to receive a signal whenever a dot is printed, a bit counter with clock and clear input terminals, a positive feedback connection around the counter, and an output from the counter indicating the current count.
An encoder may be placed in the input line to the dot counter to convert the signal received.
Where a printer which includes more than one ink reservoir, the printer system may include an input port respective to each ink reservoir, to receive a signal indicative of the number of dots of ink from that reservoir printed by or to be printed by the printer, and the memory may store data representing the number of dots of ink remaining in each reservoir.
In another aspect the invention is a method of operating the printer system to predict when said ink reservoir will run out of ink. comprising the following steps: receiving a signal indicative of the number of dots of ink printed by or to be printed by the printer; storing data representing the number of dots of ink remaining in the reservoir: and updating the memory as printing takes place: where, the signal indicative of the number of dots of ink printed by or to be printed by the printer is related to the signals received at the firing control ports of said nozzles.
An indication may be generated as to whether there is enough ink remaining in the reservoir to print another page, at the end of a predetermined number of pages. A new page may not be printed unless there is enough ink left.
The invention is a firing pulse duration control system for a printer, comprising: A first input port to receive a signal indicative of the voltage available.
A programmable pulse duration table, indexed by signals received at the first input port, to generate control signals that represent predetermined durations for a firing pulse. And
An output port to transmit the control signals. A second input port may be provided to receive a signal indicative of the temperature of the printhead in the printer. In this case the programmable pulse duration table is indexed by signals received from both first and second input ports to generate the control signals.
The table of pulse durations allows the use of a lower cost power supply, and aids in maintaining more accurate drop ejection.
The entries in the table may represent values in the range of 0-4ms and a control output is generated according to the entry indexed.
A pulse width generator will, in use, be placed downstream of the control system to receive its control output and generate the firing pulses for the printhead.
The table may be written before printing the first page of a print run. The table may be updated in between pages of a print run, if desired.
Each entry in the table may include a weighting from one or more of the following features: • User brightness settings • Viscosity curve of ink
• Tsense informs the controller how hot the printhead is. This allows the controller to adjust timing of firing pulses, since temperature affects the viscosity of the ink. • Vsense informs the controller how much voltage is available to the actuator. This allows the controller to compensate for a flat battery or high voltage source by adjusting the pulse width.
• Rsense informs the controller of the resistivity (Ohms per square) of the actuator heater. This allows the controller to adjust the pulse widths to maintain a constant energy irrespective of the heater resistivity.
• Wsense informs the controller of the width of the critical part of the heater, which may vary up to ± 5% due to lithographic and etching variations. This allows the controller to adjust the pulse width appropriately. The Pulse Duration table may have 256 entries, and each entry may be
8-bits. The signal indicative of voltage may come from Vsense. and the signal indicative of temperature may come from Tsense. In this case the signals received at the input ports may be converted for use to index the table. An 8- bit entry to the table may be indexed by two 4-bit numbers, so the upper 4- bits may come from Vsense. and the lower 4-bits may come from Tsense.
In a further aspect the invention concerns a firing pulse duration control system for a printer, comprising: a first input port; a programmable pulse duration table; and an output port: a method of generating a firing pulse duration control signal, comprising the steps of: receiving a first signal indicative of the voltage available: indexing the programmable pulse duration table by the first signal to generate control signals that represent predetermined durations for a firing pulse: and transmitting the control signals.
BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS
An example of a printer embodying the invention will now be described with reference to the accompanying drawings, in which: Figure 1 is a table which illustrates the sustained printing rate achievable with double-buffering in the printer.
Figure 2 is a flowchart showing the conceptual data flow from application to printed page.
Figure 3 is a pictorial view of the iPrint printer in its closed configuration. Figure 4 is a pictorial view of the iPrint printer in its open configuration.
Figure 5 is a cutaway diagram showing the paper path through the printer.
Figure 6 is a pictorial cutaway view of a Merrijet printhead cartridge and printhead capping mechanism.
Figure 7 is a sectional view of the Memjet printhead cartridge and printhead capping mechanism of Figure 6.
Figure 8 is a pictorial view of the printer controller. Figure 9 is an example of coding a simple black and white image. Figure 10 is a schematic diagram of a pod of ten printing nozzles numbered in firing order.
Figure 11 is a schematic diagram of the same pod of ten printing nozzles numbered in load order.
Figure 12 is a schematic diagram of a chromapod. Figure 13 is a schematic diagram of a podgroup of five chromapods.
Figure 14 is a schematic diagram of a phasegroup of two podgroups. Figure 15 is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between Segments, Firegroups. Phasegroups, Podgroups and Chromapods.
Figure 16 is a phase diagram of the AEnable and BEnable lines during a typical Print Cycle. Figure 17 is a diagram of the Printer controller architecture. Figure 18 is a flowchart summarising the page expansion and printing data flow.
Figure 19 is a block diagram of the EDRL expander unit. Figure 20 is a block diagram of the EDRL stream decoder.
Figure 21 is a block diagram of the Runlength Decoder. Figure 22 is a block diagram of the Runlength Encoder. Figure 23 is a block diagram of the JPEG decoder. Figure 24 is a block diagram of the Halftoner/Compositor unit. Figure 25 is a series of page lines that show the relationships between page widths and margins.
Figure 26 is a block diagram of a Multi-threshold dither. Figure 27 is a block diagram of the logic of the Triple-threshold unit. Figure 28 is a block diagram of the internal structure of the Printhead Interface.
Figure 29 is a diagram of the conceptual overview of double buffering during print lines N and N+l.
Figure 30 is a block diagram of the structure of the LLFU. Figure 31 is a diagram of the conceptual structure of a Buffer. Figure 32 is a diagram of the logical structure of a Buffer.
Figure 33 is a block diagram of the generation of AEnable and BEnable Pulse Widths.
Figure 34 is a diagram of the Dot Count logic. Figure 35 is a block diagram of the speaker interface. Figure 36 is a diagram of a two-layer page buffer.
Figure 37 is a series of diagrams showing the compositing of a black object onto a white image.
Figure 38 is a series of diagrams showing the compositing of a contone object onto a white image. Figure 39 is a series of diagrams showing the compositing of a black object onto an image containing a contone object.
Figure 40 is a series of diagrams showing the compositing of an opaque contone object onto an image containing a black object. Figure 41 is a series of diagrams showing the compositing of a transparent contone object onto an image containing a black object.
Figure 42 is a block diagram of the Windows 9x/NT printing system with printer driver components.
DESCRIPTION OF PREFERRED AND OTHER EMBODIMENTS
1 Introduction
The invention will be described with reference to a high-performance color printer which combines photographic-quality image reproduction with magazine-quality text reproduction. The printer utilizes an 8" page-width drop-on-demand microelectromechanical inkjet ("Memjet") printhead which produces 1600 dots per inch (dpi) bi-level CMYK (Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, blacK). It prints' 30 full-color A4 or Letter pages per minute, and is intended as an entry-level desktop printer. The printer has been designated as iPrint and will be referred to by that name in the following description.
1.1 Operational Overview iPrint reproduces black text and graphics directly using bi-level black, and continuous-tone (contone) images and graphics using dithered bi-level CMYK. For practical purposes, iPrint supports a black resolution of 800 dpi. and a contone resolution of 267 pixels per inch (ppi). iPrint is. in use. attached to a workstation or personal computer (PC) via a relatively low-speed (1.5MBytes/s) universal serial bus (USB) connection [14]. iPrint relies on the PC to render each page to the level of contone pixels and black dots. The PC compresses each rendered page to less than 3MB for sub-two-second delivery to the printer. iPrint decompresses and prints the page line by line at the speed of the Memjet printhead. iPrint contains sufficient buffer memory for two compressed pages (6MB), allowing it to print one page while receiving the next, but does not contain sufficient buffer memory for even a single uncompressed page (119MB).
1.2 Page Width
The standard Memjet nozzle layout has a half-inch unit cell, and so can be trivially adapted to page widths which are multiples of half an inch. Arbitrary page widths can be achieved with custom nozzle layouts, in markets which justify such specialisation. The initial Memjet building block is a widely useful four-inch printhead which makes efficient use of a six-inch silicon wafer. The iPrint design therefore assumes an eight-inch Memjet printhead. made up of two four-inch printheads joined together. The use of a wider printhead to achieve full bleed on A4/Letter pages only affects a few aspects of the iPrint design - specifically the exact mechanical design, and the logic of the printhead interface.
2 Memjet-Based Printing
A Memjet printhead produces 1600 dpi bi-level CMYK. On low- diffusion paper, each ejected drop forms an almost perfectly circular 22.5 micron diameter dot. Dots are easily produced in isolation, allowing dispersed-dot dithering to be exploited to its fullest. Since the Memjet printhead is page-width and operates with a constant paper velocity, the four color planes are printed in perfect registration, allowing ideal dot-on-dot printing. Since there is consequently no spatial interaction between color planes, the same dither matrix is used for each color plane.
A page layout may contain a mixture of images, graphics and text. Continuous-tone (contone) images and graphics are reproduced using a stochastic dispersed-dot dither. Unlike a clustered-dot (or amplitude- modulated) dither, a dispersed-dot (or frequency-modulated) dither reproduces high spatial frequencies (i.e. image detail) almost to the limits of the dot resolution, while simultaneously reproducing lower spatial frequencies to their full color depth. A stochastic dither matrix is carefully designed to be free of objectionable low-frequency patterns when tiled across the image. As such its size typically exceeds the minimum size required to support a number of intensity levels (i.e. 16x 16 x 8 bits for 257 intensity levels). iPrint uses a dither volume of size 64x 64x 3 x 8 bits. The volume provides an extra degree of freedom during the design of the dither by allowing a dot to change states multiple times through the intensity range (rather than just once as in a conventional dither matrix). Human contrast sensitivity peaks at a spatial frequency of about 3 cycles per degree of visual field and then falls off logarithmically, decreasing by a factor of 100 and becoming difficult to measure beyond about 40 cycles per degree [2]. At a normal viewing distance of between 400mm and 250mm, this translates roughly to 150-250 cycles per inch (cpi) on the printed page, or 300-500 samples per inch according to Nyquist's theorem. Taking into account the fact that color sensitivity is less acute than grayscale sensitivity, contone resolution beyond about 400 pixels per inch (ppi) is therefore of limited utility, and in fact contributes slightly to color error through the dither. Black text and graphics are reproduced directly using bi-level black dots, and are therefore not antialiased (i.e. low-pass filtered) before being printed. Text is therefore supersampled beyond the perceptual limits discussed above, to produce smooth edges when spatially integrated. Text resolution up to about 1200 dpi continues to contribute to perceived text sharpness (assuming low-diffusion paper, of course).
3.1 Constraints
USB (Universal Serial Bus) is the standard low-speed peripheral connection on new PCs [4]. The standard high-speed peripheral connection, IEEE 1394. is recommended but unfortunately still optional in the PC 99 specification [5], and so may not be in widespread use when iPrint is first launched. iPrint therefore connects to a personal computer (PC) or workstation via USB, and the speed of the USB connection therefore imposes the most significant constraint on the architecture of the iPrint system. At a sustained printing rate of 30 pages/minute, USB at 1.5MByte/s imposes an average limit of 3MB/page. Since the act of interrupting a Memjet-based printer during the printing of a page produces a visible discontinuity, it is advantageous for the printer to receive the entire page before commencing printing, to eliminate the possibility of buffer underrun. Since the printer can contain only limited buffer memory, i.e. two pages" worth or 6MB. then the
3MB/page limit must be considered absolute.
Figure 1 illustrates the sustained printing rate achievable with double- buffering in the printer. The first stage 1 requires the first page to be rendered in the PC. and this takes up to two seconds. During the second stage 2 the next page is rendered and the first page is transferred to the printer, again this takes up to two seconds. In the third stage 3 the first page is printed, the second page is transferred and a third page is rendered, this takes two seconds. As a result it takes up to six seconds for the first page to be printed and thereafter a page can be printed every two seconds. Other desktop connection options provide similar bandwidth to USB. and so impose similar constraints on the architecture. These include the parallel port at 2MB/s. and lOBase-T Ethernet at around lMB/s.
3.2 Page Rendering and Compression Page rendering (or rasterization) can be split between the PC and printer in various ways. Some printers support a full page description language (PDL) such as Postscript, and contain correspondingly sophisticated Tenderers. Other printers provide special support only for rendering text, to achieve high text resolution. This usually includes support for built-in or downloadable fonts. In each case the use of an embedded Tenderer reduces the rendering burden on the PC and reduces the amount of data transmitted from the PC to the printer. However, this comes at a price. These printers are more complex than they might be, and are often unable to provide full support for the graphics system of the PC, through which application programs construct, render and print pages. They often fail to exploit the high performance of current PCs, and are unable to leverage projected exponential growth in PC performance. iPrint relies on the PC 4 to render pages, i.e. contone images and graphics to the pixel level, and black text and graphics to the dot level. iPrint
5 contains only a simple rendering engine which dithers the contone data and combines the results with any foreground bi-level black text and graphics. This strategy keeps the printer simple, and independent of any page description language or graphics system. It fully exploits the high performance of current PCs. The downside of this strategy is the potentially large amount of data which must be transmitted from the PC to the printer. We consequently use compression to reduce this data to the 3MB/page required to allow a sustained printing rate of 30 pages/minute. Figure 2 is a flowchart illustrating the conceptual data flow from an application 6 to a printed page 7.
An 8" by 11.7" A4 page has a bi-level CMYK pagesize of 114.3MBytes at 1600 dpi, and a contone CMYK pagesize of 32JMB at 300 ppi.
In the printer driver 8, we use JPEG compression 9 to compress the contone data. Although JPEG is inherently lossy, for compression ratios of
10:1 or less the loss is usually negligible [16] . To obtain an integral contone to bi-level ratio, and to provide some compression leeway, we choose a contone resolution of 267 ppi. This yields a contone CMYK pagesize of 25.5MB. a corresponding compression ratio of 8.5:1 to fit within the 3MB/page limit, and a contone to bi-level ratio of 1:6 in each dimension.
A full page of black text (and/or graphics) rasterized at printer resolution (1600 dpi) yields a bi-level image of 28.6MB. Since rasterizing text at 1600 dpi places a heavy burden on the PC for a small gain, we choose to rasterize text at a fully acceptable 800 dpi. This yields a bi-level image of 7.1MB. requiring a lossless compression ratio of less than 2.5:1 to fit within the 3MB/page limit. We achieve this with a two-dimensional compression scheme adapted from Group 4 Facsimile, all indicated generally at 10.
As long as the image and text regions of a page are non-overlapping, any combination of the two fits within the 3MB limit. If text lies on top of a background image, then the worst case is a compressed pagesize approaching 6MB (depending on the actual text compression ratio). This fits within the printer's page buffer memory, but prevents double-buffering of pages in the printer, thereby reducing the printer's page rate by two-thirds, i.e. to 10 pages/minute.
3.3 Page Expansion and Printing
As described above, the PC renders contone images and graphics to the pixel level, and black text and graphics to the dot level. These are compressed 11 by different means and transmitted together to the printer. The printer contains two 3MB page buffers - one 12 for the page being received from the PC. and one 13 for the page being printed. The printer expands the compressed page as it is being printed. This expansion consists of decompressing the 267 ppi contone CMYK image data 14, halftoning the resulting contone pixels to 1600 dpi bi-level CMYK dots 15, decompressing the 800 dpi bi-level black text data 16. and compositing the resulting bi-level black text dots over the corresponding bi-level CMYK image dots 17.
The conceptual data flow from the application to the printed page is illustrated in Figure 2.
4 Printer Hardware
Because of the simplicity of the page width Memjet printhead, iPrint is very compact. It measures just 270mm wide x 85mm deep x 77mm high when closed. Figure 3 is a pictorial view of the iPrint 21 when closed. The cover 22 opens to form part of the paper tray, as shown in Figure 4. A second part 23 is hinged within cover 22 and opens to extend the paper tray. A paper exit tray 24 is slideably extendable from the front of the printer.
The front panel 25. revealed when cover 22 is opened, contains the user interface - the power button 26 and power indicator LED 27, the paper feed button 28, and the out-of-paper 29 and ink low 30 LEDs.
4.1 Paper Path iPrint uses a standard paper transport mechanism. The paper path 50 is illustrated in Figure 5. in which a single stepper motor 51 drives both the sheet feed roller 52 and the paper transport. When running in the forward direction the stepper motor drives the paper drive roller 53 and the pinch wheels 54 at the start and end of the active paper path, respectively. When reversed, the stepper motor drives the sheet feed roller 52 which grabs the topmost sheet from the sheet feeder and transports it the short distance to the paper drive roller 53 where it is detected by the mechanical media sensor 55.
The paper centering sliders 56 ensure that the paper is centered. This ensures that a single centered media sensor detects the sheet, and also ensures that sheets wider than the printhead are printed with balanced margins.
4.1.1 Memjet Printhead
The replaceable Memjet printhead cartridge 60 is also shown in Figure 5. This represents one of the four possible ways to deploy the printhead in conjunction with the ink cartridge in a product such as iPrint:
• permanent printhead, replaceable ink cartridge (as shown here)
• separate replaceable printhead and ink cartridges
• refillable combined printhead and ink cartridge
• disposable combined printhead and ink cartridge Under the printhead cartridge 60 is a printhead assembly 61 and a printhead capping mechanism 62, illustrated in pictorial cut away view in Figure 6 and in section in Figure 7. When not in use, the Memjet printhead 63 remains filled with ink, and so must be capped to prevent evaporation of ink through the nozzles. Ink evaporation can lead to gradual deposition of ink components which can impair nozzle operation. iPrint includes a mechanical page width capping mechanism 62 which consists of a pivoting capping molding 64 with an elastomeric seal 65 and sponge 66. When the printhead is not in use, the capping molding 64 is held by a spring against the face of the printhead assembly 61, and the elastomeric seal 65 conforms to the face of the printhead assembly and creates an airtight seal around the printhead 63. The sponge 66 is used to catch drops ejected during the printhead cleaning cycle. When the printhead is in use. the capping molding 64 is held away from the printhead assembly 61 and out of the paper path.
The capping molding 64 is offset by a set of flexible arms 68 from a rod 69. The capping molding 64 and arms 68 pivot with the rod 69 about its axis. A slip wheel 70 is mounted at the end of rod 69. The slip wheel 70 makes contact with a drive wheel 71. When printing is occurring, the drive wheel 71 is coupled to the paper transport motor and is driven in the uncapping direction 72. This causes the slip wheel 70 and rod 69 to rotate about its axis and swings the capping molding 64 away from the printhead. Once the slip wheel rotates to the uncapping slip point 73, the slip wheel and the capping molding stop rotating. When printing is complete, the drive wheel is reversed and driven in the capping direction 74. Once the slip wheel rotates to the capping slip point 75, the slip wheel and the capping molding stop rotating, and the capping spring holds the capping plate in place against the face of the printhead assembly. The flexible arms 68 help the capping plate 67 conform to the face of the printhead assembly 61. 4.2 Printer Controller
The printer controller 80 is illustrated in Figure 8, and consists of a small PCB 81 with only a few components - a 64Mbit RDRAM 82, the iPrint Central Processor (ICP) chip 83. a speaker 84 for notifying the user of error conditions, a QA chip 85, an external 3V DC power connection 86, an external USB connection 87. a connection to the paper transport stepper motor 88, and the flex PCB 89 which connects to the media sensor 55, LEDs 7. 9 and 10, buttons 6 and 8, and a link 90 the printhead 63.
4.3 Ink Cartridge and Ink Path
There are two versions of the ink cartridge - one large, one small. Both fit in the same ink cartridge slot at the back of the iPrint unit.
5 Printer Control Protocol This section describes the printer control protocol used between a host and iPrint. It includes control and status handling as well as the actual page description.
5.1 Control and Status The USB device class definition for printers [15] provides for emulation of both unidirectional and bidirectional IEEE 1284 parallel ports [3]. At its most basic level, this allows the host to determine printer capabilities (via GET_DEVICE_ID), obtain printer status (via GET_PORT_STATUS), and reset the printer (via SOFT_RESET). Centronics/IEEE 1284 printer status fields are described in Table 1 below.
Figure imgf000047_0001
Paper A paper empty condition exists in the printer. Empty
Fault A fault condition exists in the printer (includes Paper Empty and not Select).
Personal computer printing subsystems typically provide some level of IEEE 1284 support. Compatibility with IEEE 1284 in a printer therefore simplifies the development of the corresponding printer driver. The USB device class definition for printers seeks to leverage this same compatibility. iPrint supports no control protocol beyond the USB device class definition for printers. Note that, if a higher-level control protocol were defined, then conditions such as out-of-ink could also be reported to the user (rather than just via the printer's out-of-ink LED). iPrint receives page descriptions as raw transfers, i.e. not encapsulated in any higher-level control protocol.
5.2 Page Description iPrint reproduces black at full dot resolution (1600 dpi), but reproduces contone color at a somewhat lower resolution using halftoning. The page description is therefore divided into a black layer and a contone layer. The black layer is defined to composite over the contone layer.
The black layer consists of a bitmap containing a 1-bit opacity for each pixel. This black layer matte has a resolution which is an integer factor of the printer's dot resolution. The highest supported resolution is 1600 dpi, i.e. the printer's full dot resolution.
The contone layer consists of a bitmap containing a 32-bit CMYK color for each pixel. This contone image has a resolution which is an integer factor of the printer's dot resolution. The highest supported resolution is 267 ppi, i.e. one-sixth the printer's dot resolution. The contone resolution is also typically an integer factor of the black resolution, to simplify calculations in the printer driver. This is not a requirement, however.
The black layer and the contone layer are both in compressed form for efficient transmission over the low-speed USB connection to the printer.
5.2.1 Page Structure iPrint has a printable page area which is determined by the width of its printhead. the characteristics of its paper path, and the size of the currently selected print medium.
The printable page area has a maximum width of 8". If the physical page width exceeds 8", then symmetric left and right margins are implicitly created. If the physical page width is less than 8", then the printable page width is reduced accordingly. The printable page area has no maximum length. It is simply the physical page length, less the top and bottom margins imposed by the characteristics of the paper path.
The target page size is constrained by the printable page area, less the explicit (target) left and top margins specified in the page description. In theory iPrint does not impose a top or bottom margin - i.e. it allows full bleed in the vertical direction. In practice, however, since iPrint is not designed as a full-bleed A4/Letter printer because it uses an 8" printhead, an artificial top and bottom margin is imposed to avoid having to include a sponge large enough to cope with regular off-edge printing.
5.2.2 Page Description Format
Table 2 shows the format of the page description expected by iPrint.
[TABLE 2 Page description format field format description
Figure imgf000050_0001
Figure imgf000051_0001
Apart from being implicitly defined in relation to the printable page area, each page description is complete and self-contained. There is no data transmitted to the printer separately from the page description to which the page description refers.
The page description contains a signature and version which allow the printer to identify the page description format. If the signature and/or version are missing or incompatible with the printer, then the printer can reject the page. The page description defines the resolution and size of the target page.
The black and contone layers are clipped to the target page if necessary. This happens whenever the black or contone scale factors are not factors of the target page width or height.
The target left and top margins define the positioning of the target page within the printable page area.
The black layer parameters define the pixel size of the black layer, its integer scale factor to the target resolution, and the size of its compressed page data. The variable-size black page data follows the fixed-size parts of the page description. The contone layer parameters define the pixel size of the contone layer, its integer scale factor to the target resolution, and the size of its compressed page data. The variable-size contone page data follows the variable-size black page data.
All integers in the page description are stored in big-endian byte order. The variable-size black page data and the variable-size contone page data are aligned to 8-byte boundaries. The size of the required padding is included in the size of the fixed-size part of the page description structure and the variable-size black data. The entire page description has a target size of less than 3MB, and a maximum size of 6MB. in accordance with page buffer memory in the printer.
The following sections describe the format of the compressed black layer and the compressed contone layer.
5.2.3 Bi-level Black Layer Compression
5.2.3.1 Group 3 and 4 Facsimile Compression
The Group 3 Facsimile compression algorithm [1] losslessly compresses bi-level data for transmission over slow and noisy telephone lines. The bi-level data represents scanned black text and graphics on a white background, and the algorithm is tuned for this class of images (it is explicitly not tuned, for example, for halfioned bi-level images). The ID Group 3 algorithm runlength-encodes each scanline and then Huffman- encodes the resulting runlengths. Runlengths in the range 0 to 63 are coded with terminating codes. Runlengths in the range 64 to 2623 are coded with make-up codes, each representing a multiple of 64, followed by a terminating code. Runlengths exceeding 2623 are coded with multiple make-up codes followed by a terminating code. The Huffman tables are fixed, but are separately tuned for black and white runs (except for make-up codes above
1728, which are common). When possible, the 2D Group 3 algorithm encodes a scanline as a set of short edge deltas (0, ±1, ±2, ±3) with reference to the previous scanline. The delta symbols are entropy-encoded (so that the zero delta symbol is only one bit long etc.) Edges within a 2D-encoded line which can't be delta-encoded are runlength-encoded, and are identified by a prefix.
ID- and 2D-encoded lines are marked differently. ID-encoded lines are generated at regular intervals, whether actually required or not, to ensure that the decoder can recover from line noise with minimal image degradation. 2D Group 3 achieves compression ratios of up to 6:1 [13]. The Group 4 Facsimile algorithm [1] losslessly compresses bi-level data for transmission over error-free communications lines (i.e. the lines are truly error- free, or error-correction is done at a lower protocol level). The Group 4 algorithm is based on the 2D Group 3 algorithm, with the essential modification that since transmission is assumed to be error-free. ID-encoded lines are no longer generated at regular intervals as an aid to error-recovery. Group 4 achieves compression ratios ranging from 20:1 to 60:1 for the CCITT set of test images [13].
The design goals and performance of the Group 4 compression algorithm qualify it as a compression algorithm for the bi-level black layer.
However, its Huffman tables are tuned to a lower scanning resolution (100- 400 dpi), and it encodes runlengths exceeding 2623 awkwardly. At 800 dpi, our maximum runlength is currently 6400. Although a Group 4 decoder core might be available for use in the printer controller chip (Section 7), it might not handle runlengths exceeding those normally encountered in 400 dpi facsimile applications, and so would require modification.
Since most of the benefit of Group 4 comes from the delta-encoding, a simpler algorithm based on delta-encoding alone is likely to meet our requirements. This approach is described in detail below.
5.2.3.2 Bi-Level Edge Delta and Runlength (EDRL) Compression Format
The edge delta and runlength (EDRL) compression format is based loosely on the Group 4 compression format and its precursors [1][17].
EDRL uses three kinds of symbols, appropriately entropy-coded. These are create edge, kill edge, and edge delta. Each line is coded with reference to its predecessor. The predecessor of the first line is defined to a line of white. Each line is defined to start off white. If a line actually starts of black (the less likely situation), then it must define a black edge at offset zero. Each line must define an edge at its left-hand end. i.e. at offset page width. An edge can be coded with reference to an edge in the previous line if there is an edge within the maximum delta range with the same sense (white- to-black or black-to-white). This uses one of the edge delta codes. The shorter and likelier deltas have the shorter codes. The maximum delta range (±2) is chosen to match the distribution of deltas for typical glyph edges. This distribution is mostly independent of point size. A typical example is given in Table 3.
Figure imgf000054_0001
An edge can also be coded using the length of the run from the previous edge in the same line. This uses one of the create edge codes for short (7-bit) and long (13-bit) runlengths. For simplicity, and unlike Group 4, runlengths are not entropy-coded. In order to keep edge deltas implicitly synchronised with edges in the previous line, each unused edge in the previous line is 'killed' when passed in the current line. This uses the kill edge code. The end-of-page code signals the end of the page to the decoder.
Note that 7-bit and 13-bit runlengths are specifically chosen to support 800 dpi A4/Letter pages. Longer runlengths could be supported without significant impact on compression performance. For example, if supporting 1600 dpi compression, the runlengths should be at least 8-bit and 14-bit respectively. A general-purpose choice might be 8-bit and 16-bit, thus supporting up to 40" wide 1600 dpi pages.
The full set of codes is defined in Table 4. Note that there is no end-of- line code. The decoder uses the page width to detect the end of the line. The lengths of the codes are ordered by the relative probabilities of the codes' occurrence.
Figure imgf000055_0001
Figure 9 shows an example of coding a simple black and white image 90. The image is arranged as lines 91 of pixels 92. The first line 91 is assumed to be white and, since it is, is coded as Δ0. Note that the common situation of an all-white line following another all-white line is coded using a single bit (Δ0). and an all-black line following another all-black line is coded using two bits (Δ0, Δ0). Where an edge occurs in a line, such as the fourth line 93. the create code is used to define the edges. In the next line 94, the Δ- 1 and Δ+ l codes are used to move the edges. In the next line 95, it is more convenient to create a new edge and kill the old edge rather than move it.
EDRL encoding example Note that the foregoing describes the compression format, not the compression algorithm per se. A variety of equivalent encodings can be produced for the same image, some more compact than others. For example, a pure runlength encoding conforms to the compression format. The goal of the compression algorithm is to discover a good, if not the best, encoding for a given image.
The following is a simple algorithm for producing the EDRL encoding of a line with reference to its predecessor.
#define SHORT_RUN_PRECISION7 // precision of short run #define LONG_RUN_PRECISIONl3 // precision of long run
EDRL_CompressLine
(
Byte prevLine[], // previous (reference) bi-level line
Byte currLine[], // current (coding) bi-level line int lineLen. // line length
BITSTREAM s // output (compressed) bitstream
) int prevEdge = 0 // current edge offset in previous line int currEdge = 0 // current edge offset in current line int codedEdge = currEdge // most recent coded (output) edge int prevColor = 0 // current color in previous line (0 = white) int currColor = 0 // current color in current line int prevRun // current run in previous line int currRun // current run in current line bool bUpdatePrevEdge = true // force first edge update bool bUpdateCurrEdge = true // force first edge update while (codedEdge < lineLen) // possibly update current edge in previous line if (bUpdatePrevEdge) if (prevEdge < lineLen) prevRun = GetRun(prevLine. prevEdge, lineLen. prevColor) else prevRun = 0 prevEdge + = prevRun prevColor = IprevColor bUpdatePrevEdge = false
// possibly update current edge in current line if (bUpdateCurrEdge) if (currEdge < lineLen) currRun = GetRun(currLine, currEdge, lineLen, currColor) else currRun = 0 currEdge + = currRun currColor = ! currColor bUpdateCurrEdge = false
// output delta whenever possible, i.e. when // edge senses match, and delta is small enough if (prevColor = = currColor) delta = currEdge - prevEdge if (abs(delta) < = MAX_DELTA)
PutCode(s, EDGE_DELTA0 + delta) codedEdge = currEdge bUpdatePrevEdge = true bUpdateCurrEdge = true continue
// kill unmatched edge in previous line if (prevEdge < = currEdge) PutCode(s. KILL_EDGE) bUpdatePrevEdge = true
// create unmatched edge in current line if (currEdge < = prevEdge) PutCode(s, CREATE_EDGE) if (currRun < 128) PutCode(s. CREATE_NEAR_EDGE) PutBits(currRun. SHORT_RUN_PRECISION) else PutCode(s. CREATE_FAR_EDGE)
PutBits(currRun, LONG_RUN_PRECISION) codedEdge = currEdge bUpdateCurrEdge = true
Note that the algorithm is blind to actual edge continuity between lines, and may in fact match the "wrong" edges between two lines. Happily the compression format has nothing to say about this, since it decodes correctly, and it is difficult for a "wrong" match to have a detrimental effect on the compression ratio.
For completeness the corresponding decompression algorithm is given below. It forms the core of the EDRL Expander unit in the printer controller chip (Section 7). EDRL_DecomρressLine
(
BITSTREAM s. // input (compressed) bitstream
Byte prevLine[], // previous (reference) bi-level line
Byte currLine[], // current (coding) bi-level line int lineLen // line length
) int prevEdge = 0 // current edge offset in previous line int currEdge = 0 // current edge offset in current line int prevColor = 0 // current color in previous line (0 = white) int currColor = 0 // current color in current line while (currEdge < lineLen) code = GetCode(s) switch (code) case EDGE_DELTA_MINUS2: case EDGE_DELTA_MINUSl: case EDGE_DELTA_0: case EDGE DELTA PLUSl: case EDGE_DELTA_PLUS2:
// create edge from delta int delta = code - EDGE_DELTA_0 int run = prevEdge + delta - currEdge
FillBitRun(currLine. currEdge. currColor. run) currEdge + = run currColor = IcurrColor prevEdge + = GetRun(prevLine. prevEdge, lineLen, prevColor) prevColor = ! prevColor case KILL EDGE:
// discard unused reference edge prevEdge + = GetRun(prevLine. prevEdge, lineLen, prevColor) prevColor = ! prevColor case CREATE_NEAR_EDGE: case CREATE_FAR_EDGE:
// create edge explicitly int run if (code = = CREATE_NEAR_EDGE) run = GetBits(s, SHORT RUN PRECISION) else run = GetBits(s, LONG RUN PRECISION)
FillBitRun(currLine, currEdge, currColor. run) currColor = IcurrColor currEdge + = run
5.2.3.3 EDRL Compression Performance
Table 5 shows the compression performance of Group 4 and EDRL on the CCITT test documents used to select the Group 4 algorithm. Each document represents a single page scanned at 400 dpi. Group 4's superior performance is due to its entropy-coded runlengths. tuned to 400 dpi features.
Figure imgf000060_0001
Magazine text is typically typeset in a typeface with serifs (such as Times) at a point size of 10. At this size an A4/Letter page holds up to 14,000 characters, though a typical magazine page holds only about 7,000 characters. Text is seldom typeset at a point size smaller than 5. At 800 dpi, text cannot be meaningfully rendered at a point size lower than 2 using a standard typeface. Table 6 illustrates the legibility of various point sizes.
Figure imgf000061_0001
Table 7 shows Group 4 and EDRL compression performance on pages of text of varying point sizes, rendered at 800 dpi. Note that EDRL achieves the required compression ratio of 2.5 for an entire page of text typeset at a point size of 3. The distribution of characters on the test pages is based on English-language statistics [12].
Figure imgf000061_0002
Figure imgf000062_0001
For a point size of 9 or greater, EDRL slightly outperforms Group 4, simply because Group 4's runlength codes are tuned to 400 dpi.
These compression results bear out the observation that entropy- encoded runlengths contribute much less to compression than 2D encoding, unless the data is poorly correlated vertically, such as in the case of very small characters.
5.2.4 Contone Layer Compression 5.2.4.1 JPEG Compression
The JPEG compression algorithm [6] lossily compresses a contone image at a specified quality level. It introduces imperceptible image degradation at compression ratios below 5:1, and negligible image degradation at compression ratios below 10:1 [16]. JPEG typically first transforms the image into a color space which separates luminance and chrominance into separate color channels. This allows the chrominance channels to be subsampled without appreciable loss because of the human visual system's relatively greater sensitivity to luminance than chrominance. After this first step, each color channel is compressed separately.
The image is divided into 8x8 pixel blocks. Each block is then transformed into the frequency domain via a discrete cosine transform (DCT). This transformation has the effect of concentrating image energy in relatively lower-frequency coefficients, which allows higher-frequency coefficients to be more crudely quantized. This quantization is the principal source of compression in JPEG. Further compression is achieved by ordering coefficients by frequency to maximise the likelihood of adjacent zero coefficients, and then runlength-encoding runs of zeroes. Finally, the runlengths and non-zero frequency coefficients are entropy coded. Decompression is the inverse process of compression.
5.2.4.2 CMYK Contone JPEG Compression Format
The CMYK contone layer is compressed to an interleaved color JPEG bytestream. The interleaving is required for space-efficient decompression in the printer, but may restrict the decoder to two sets of Huffman tables rather than four (i.e. one per color channel) [16]. If luminance and chrominance are separated, then the luminance channels can share one set of tables, and the chrominance channels the other set.
If luminance/chrominance separation is deemed necessary, either for the purposes of table sharing or for chrominance subsampling, then CMY is converted to YCrCb and Cr and Cb are duly subsampled. K is treated as a luminance channel and is not subsampled.
The JPEG bytestream is complete and self-contained. It contains all data required for decompression, including quantization and Huffman tables.
6 Memjet Printhead
An 8-inch Memjet printhead consists of two standard 4-inch Memjet printheads joined together side by side.
The two 4-inch printheads are wired up together in a specific way for use in iPrint. Since the wiring requires knowledge of the 4-inch printhead. an overview of the 4-inch printhead is presented here.
6.1 Composition of a 4-inch Printhead
Each 4-inch printhead consists of 8 segments, each segment 1/2 an inch in length. Each of the segments prints bi-level cyan, magenta, yellow and black dots over a different part of the page to produce the final image.
Since the printhead prints dots at 1600 dpi, each dot is approximately 22.5 microns in diameter, and spaced 15.875 microns apart. Thus each half- inch segment prints 800 dots, with the 8 segments corresponding to the positions shown in Table 8. PAGE INTENTIONALY LEFT BLANK
Figure imgf000066_0001
Although each segment produces 800 dots of the final image, each dot is represented by a combination of bi-level cyan, magenta, yellow and black ink. Because the printing is bi-level. the input image should be dithered or error-diffused for best results.
Each segment then contains 3.200 nozzles: 800 each of cyan, magenta, yellow and black. A four-inch printhead contains 8 such segments for a total of 25.600 nozzles.
6.1.1 Grouping of Nozzles Within a Segment
The nozzles within a single segment are grouped for reasons of physical stability as well as minimization of power consumption during printing. In terms of physical stability, a total of 10 nozzles share the same ink reservoir. In terms of power consumption, groupings are made to enable a low-speed and a high-speed printing mode.
The printhead supports two printing speeds to albw speed/power consumption trade-offs to be made in different product configurations. In the low-speed printing mode, 128 nozzles are fired simultaneously from each 4-inch printhead. The fired nozzles should be maximally distant, so 16 nozzles are fired from each segment. To fire all 25.600 nozzles. 200 different sets of 128 nozzles must be fired. In the high-speed printing mode, 256 nozzles are fired simultaneously from each 4-inch printhead. The fired nozzles should be maximally distant, so 32 nozzles are fired from each segment. To fire all 25,600 nozzles, 100 different sets of 256 nozzles must be fired.
The power consumption in the low-speed mode is half that of the high- speed mode. Note, however, that the energy consumed to print a page is the same in both cases.
6.1.1.1 Ten Nozzles Make a Pod
A single pod 100 consists of 10 nozzles 101 sharing a common ink reservoir. 5 nozzles are in one row, and 5 are in another. Each nozzle produces dots 22.5 microns in diameter spaced on a 15.875 micron grid. Figure 10 shows the arrangement of a single pod 100. with the nozzles 101 numbered according to the order in which they must be fired.
Although the nozzles are fired in this order, the relationship of nozzles and physical placement of dots on the printed page is different. The nozzles from one row represent the even dots from one line on the page, and the nozzles on the other row represent the odd dots from the adjacent line on the page. Figure 11 shows the same pod 100 with the nozzles numbered according to the order in which they must be loaded. The nozzles within a pod are therefore logically separated by the width of 1 dot. The exact distance between the nozzles will depend on the properties of the Memjet firing mechanism. The printhead is designed with staggered nozzles designed to match the flow of paper.
6.1.1.2 One Pod of Each Color Makes a Chromapod One pod of each color, that is cyan 121, magenta 122. yellow 123 and black 124, are grouped into a chromapod 125. A chromapod represents different color components of the same horizontal set of 10 dots on different lines. The exact distance between different color pods depends on the Memjet operating parameters, and may vary from one Memjet design to another. The distance is considered to be a constant number of dot- widths, and must therefore be taken into account when printing: the dots printed by the cyan nozzles will be for different lines than those printed by the magenta, yellow or black nozzles. The printing algorithm must allow for a variable distance up to about 8 dot- widths between colors. Figure 12 illustrates a single chromapod.
6.1.1.3 Five Chromapods Make a Podgroup
5 chromapods 125 are organized into a single podgroup 126. Since each chromapod contains 40 nozzles, each podgroup contains 200 nozzles:
50 cyan, 50 magenta. 50 yellow, and 50 black nozzles. The arrangement is shown in Figure 13. with chromapods numbered 0-4. Note that the distance between adjacent chromapods is exaggerated for clarity.
6.1.1.4 Two Podgroups Make a Phasegroup
2 podgroups 126 are organized into a single phasegroup 127. The phasegroup is so named because groups of nozzles within a phasegroup are fired simultaneously during a given firing phase (this is explained in more detail below). The formation of a phasegroup from 2 podgroups is entirely for the purposes of low-speed and high-speed printing via 2 PodgroupEnable lines.
During low-speed printing, only one of the two PodgroupEnable lines is set in a given firing pulse, so only one podgroup of the two fires nozzles. During high-speed printing, both PodgroupEnable lines are set, so both podgroups fire nozzles. Consequently a low-speed print takes twice as long as a high-speed print, since the high-speed print fires twice as many nozzles at once.
Figure 14 illustrates the composition of a phasegroup. The distance between adjacent podgroups is exaggerated for clarity.
6.1.1.5 Two
Phasegroups Make a Firegroup
Two phasegroups 127 (PhasegroupA and PhasegroupB) are organized into a single firegroup 128. with 4 firegroups in each segment 129. Firegroups are so named because they all fire the same nozzles simultaneously. Two enable lines. AEnable and BEnable. allow the firing of PhasegroupA nozzles and PhasegroupB nozzles independently as different firing phases. The arrangement is shown in Figure 15. The distance between adjacent groupings is exaggerated for clarity.
6.1.1.6 Nozzle Grouping Summary
Table 9 is a summary of the nozzle groupings in a printhead.
Figure imgf000070_0001
An 8-inch printhead consists of two 4-inch printheads for a total of 51.200 nozzles.
6.1.2 Load and Print Cycles
A single 4-inch printhead contains a total of 25.600 nozzles. A Print Cycle involves the firing of up to all of these nozzles, dependent on the information to be printed. A Load Cycle involves the loading up of the printhead with the information to be printed during the subsequent Print Cycle.
Each nozzle has an associated NozzleEnable bit that determines whether or not the nozzle will fire during the Print Cycle. The NozzleEnable bits (one per nozzle) are loaded via a set of shift registers. Logically there are 4 shift registers per segment (one per color), each 800 deep. As bits are shifted into the shift register for a given color they are directed to the lower and upper nozzles on alternate pulses. Internally, each 800-deep shift register is comprised of two 400-deep shift registers: one for the upper nozzles, and one for the lower nozzles. Alternate bits are shifted into the alternate internal registers. As far as the external interface is concerned however, there is a single 800 deep shift register.
Once all the shift registers have been fully loaded (800 load pulses), all of the bits are transferred in parallel to the appropriate NozzleEnable bits. This equates to a single parallel transfer of 25.600 bits. Once the transfer has taken place, the Print Cycle can begin. The Print Cycle and the Load Cycle can occur simultaneously as long as the parallel load of all NozzleEnable bits occurs at the end of the Print Cycle.
6.1.2.1 Load Cycle
The Load Cycle is concerned with loading the printhead's shift registers with the next Print Cycle's NozzleEnable bits.
Each segment has 4 inputs directly related to the cyan, magenta, yellow and black shift registers. These inputs are called CDataln. MDataln. YDataln and KDataln. Since there are 8 segments, there are a total of 32 color input lines per 4-inch printhead. A single pulse on the SRClock line (shared between all 8 segments) transfers the 32 bits into the appropriate shift registers. Alternate pulses transfer bits to the lower and upper nozzles respectively. Since there are 25,600 nozzles, a total of 800 pulses are required for the transfer. Once all 25,600 bits have been transferred, a single pulse on the shared PTransfer line causes the parallel transfer of data from the shift registers to the appropriate NozzleEnable bits.
The parallel transfer via a pulse on PTransfer must take place after the Print Cycle has finished. Otherwise the NozzleEnable bits for the line being printed will be incorrect. Since all 8 segments are loaded with a single SRClock pulse, any printing process must produce the data in the correct sequence for the printhead. As an example, the first SRClock pulse will transfer the CMYK bits for the next Print Cycle's dot 0. 800, 1600, 2400. 3200. 4000, 4800. and 5600. The second SRClock pulse will transfer the CMYK bits for the next
Print Cycle's dot 1. 801, 1601. 2401, 3201, 4001. 4801 and 5601. After 800 SRClock pulses, the PTransfer pulse can be given.
It is important to note that the odd and even CMYK outputs, although printed during the same Print Cycle, do not appear on the same physical output line. The physical separation of odd and even nozzles within the printhead. as well as separation between nozzles of different colors ensures that they will produce dots on different lines of the page. This relative difference must be accounted for when loading the data into the printhead. The actual difference in lines depends on the characteristics of the inkjet mechanism used in the printhead. The differences can be defined by variables D and D2 where O1 is the distance between nozzles of different colors, and D2 is the distance between nozzles of the same color. Table 10 shows the dots transferred to segment n of a printhead on the first 4 pulses.
Figure imgf000073_0001
And so on for all 800 pulses.
Data can be clocked into the printhead at a maximum rate of 20 MHz, which will load the entire data for the next line in 40 μs.
6.1.2.2 Print Cycle
A 4-inch printhead contains 25.600 nozzles. To fire them all at once would consume too much power and be problematic in terms of ink refill and nozzle interference. Consequently two firing modes are defined: a low-speed printing mode and a high-speed printing mode:
• In the low-speed print mode, there are 200 phases, with each phase firing 128 nozzles. This equates to 16 nozzles per segment, or 4 per firegroup.
• In the high-speed print mode, there are 100 phases, with each phase firing 256 nozzles. This equates to 32 nozzles per segment, or 8 per firegroup. The nozzles to be fired in a given firing pulse are determined by
• 3 bits ChromapodSelect (select 1 of 5 chromapods from a firegroup)
• 4 bits NozzleSelect (select 1 of 10 nozzles from a pod)
• 2 bits of PodgroupEnable lines (select 0. 1, or 2 podgroups to fire) When one of the PodgroupEnable lines is set, only the specified Podgroup's 4 nozzles will fire as determined by ChromapodSelect and NozzleSelect. When both of the PodgroupEnable lines are set. both of the podgroups will fire their nozzles. For the low-speed mode, two fire pulses are required, with PodgroupEnable = 10 and 01 respectively. For the high-speed mode, only one fire pulse is required, with PodgroupEnable = 11.
The duration of the firing pulse is given by the AEnable and BEnable lines, which fire the PhasegroupA and PhasegroupB nozzles from all firegroups respectively. The typical duration of a firing pulse is 1.3 - 1.8 μs. The duration of a pulse depends on the viscosity of the ink (dependent on temperature and ink characteristics) and the amount of power available to the printhead. See Section 6.1.3 for details on feedback from the printhead in order to compensate for temperature change.
The AEnable and BEnable are separate lines in order that the firing pulses can overlap. Thus the 200 phases of a low-speed Print Cycle consist of
100 A phases and 100 B phases, effectively giving 100 sets of Phase A and Phase B. Likewise, the 100 phases of a high-speed print cycle consist of 50 A phases and 50 B phases, effectively giving 50 phases of phase A and phase B. Figure 16 shows the Aenable 130 and Benable 131 lines during a typical Print Cycle. In a high-speed print there are 50 cycles of 2 μs each, while in a low-speed print there are 100 cycles of 2 μs each. As shown in the Figure, slight variations in minimum and maximum half cycle times about the nominal, are acceptable.
For the high-speed printing mode, the firing order is:
• ChromapodSelect 0. NozzleSelect 0. PodgroupEnable 11 (Phases A and B)
• ChromapodSelect 1. NozzleSelect 0. PodgroupEnable 11 (Phases A and B)
• ChromapodSelect 2, NozzleSelect 0. PodgroupEnable 11 (Phases A and B)
• ChromapodSelect 3, NozzleSelect 0. PodgroupEnable 11 (Phases A and B) • ChromapodSelect 4. NozzleSelect 0. PodgroupEnable 11 (Phases A and B) • ChromapodSelect 0. NozzleSelect 1. PodgroupEnable 11 (Phases A and B) •
• ChromapodSelect 3. NozzleSelect 9, PodgroupEnable 11 (Phases A and B)
• ChromapodSelect 4, NozzleSelect 9. PodgroupEnable 11 (Phases A and B)
For the low-speed printing mode, the firing order is similar. For each phase of the high speed mode where PodgroupEnable was 11, two phases of PodgroupEnable = 01 and 10 are substituted as follows:
ChromapodSelect 0, NozzleSelect 0, PodgroupEnable 01 (Phases A and B) • ChromapodSelect 0. NozzleSelect 0. PodgroupEnable 10 (Phases A and B)
ChromapodSelect 1. NozzleSelect 0. PodgroupEnable 01 (Phases A and B) ChromapodSelect 1. NozzleSelect 0. PodgroupEnable 10 (Phases A and B)
ChromapodSelect 3. NozzleSelect 9, PodgroupEnable 01 (Phases A and B) • ChromapodSelect 3, NozzleSelect 9, PodgroupEnable 10 (Phases A and B)
ChromapodSelect 4. NozzleSelect 9. PodgroupEnable 01 (Phases A and B) ChromapodSelect 4. NozzleSelect 9. PodgroupEnable 10 (Phases A and B)
When a nozzle fires, it takes approximately 100 μs to refill. The nozzle cannot be fired before this refill time has elapsed. This limits the fastest printing speed to 100 μs per line. In the high-speed print mode, the time to print a line is 100 μs, so the time between firing a nozzle from one line to the next matches the refill time. The low-speed print mode is slower than this, so is also acceptable. The firing of a nozzle also causes acoustic perturbations for a limited time within the common ink reservoir of that nozzle's pod. The perturbations can interfere with the firing of another nozzle within the same pod. Consequently, the firing of nozzles within a pod should be offset from each other as long as possible. We therefore fire four nozzles from a chromapod (one nozzle per color) and then move onto the next chromapod within the podgroup.
In the low-speed printing mode the podgroups are fired separately. Thus the 5 chromapods within both podgroups must all fire before the first chromapod fires again, totalling 10 x 2 μ cycles. Consequently each pod is fired once per 20 μs.
In the high-speed printing mode, the podgroups are fired together. Thus the 5 chromapods within a single podgroups must all fire before the first chromapod fires again, totalling 5 x 2 μ cycles. Consequently each pod is fired once per 10 μs.
As the ink channel is 300 microns long and the velocity of sound in the ink is around 1500m/s. the resonant frequency of the ink channel is 2.5MHz. Thus the low-speed mode allows 50 resonant cycles for the acoustic pulse to dampen, and the high-speed mode allows 25 resonant cycles. Consequently any acoustic interference is minimal in both cases.
6.1.3 Feedback from the Printhead
The printhead produces several lines of feedback (accumulated from the 8 segments). The feedback lines are used to adjust the timing of the firing pulses. Although each segment produces the same feedback, the feedback from all segments share the same tri-state bus lines. Consequently only one segment at a time can provide feedback.
A pulse on the SenseSegSelect line ANDed with data on Cyan selects which segment will provide the feedback. The feedback sense lines will come from the selected segment until the next SenseSegSelect pulse. The feedback sense lines are as follows:
• Tsense informs the controller how hot the printhead is. This allows the controller to adjust timing of firing pulses, since temperature affects the viscosity of the ink. • Vsense informs the controller how much voltage is available to the actuator. This allows the controller to compensate for a flat battery or high voltage source by adjusting the pulse width.
• Rsense informs the controller of the resistivity (Ohms per square) of the actuator heater. This allows the controller to adjust the pulse widths to maintain a constant energy irrespective of the heater resistivity.
• Wsense informs the controller of the width of the critical part of the heater, which may vary up to ± 5% due to lithographic and etching variations. This allows the controller to adjust the pulse width appropriately.
6.1.4 Preheat Cycle
The printing process has a strong tendency to stay at the equilibrium temperature. To ensure that the first section of the printed photograph has a consistent dot size, the equilibrium temperature must be met before printing any dots. This is accomplished via a preheat cycle.
The Preheat cycle involves a single Load Cycle to all nozzles with Is (i.e. setting all nozzles to fire), and a number of short firing pulses to each nozzle. The duration of the pulse must be insufficient to fire the drops, but enough to heat up the ink. Altogether about 200 pulses for each nozzle are required, cycling through in the same sequence as a standard Print Cycle.
Feedback during the Preheat mode is provided by Tsense, and continues until equilibrium temperature is reached (about 30° C above ambient). The duration of the Preheat mode is around 50 milliseconds, and depends on the ink composition.
Preheat is performed before each print job. This does not affect performance as it is done while the data is being transferred to the printer.
6.1.5 Cleaning Cycle In order to reduce the chances of nozzles becoming clogged, a cleaning cycle can be undertaken before each print job. Each nozzle is fired a number of times into an absorbent sponge.
The cleaning cycle involves a single Load Cycle to all nozzles with Is (i.e. setting all nozzles to fire), and a number of firing pulses to each nozzle. The nozzles are cleaned via the same nozzle firing sequence as a standard Print Cycle. The number of times that each nozzle is fired depends upon the ink composition and the time that the printer has been idle. As with preheat, the cleaning cycle has no effect on printer performance.
6.1.6 Printhead Interface Summary
A single 4-inch printhead has the connections shown in Table 11:
Figure imgf000079_0001
Figure imgf000080_0001
Internal to the 4-inch printhead. each segment has the connections to the bond pads shown in Table 12:
Figure imgf000081_0001
TOTAL 66 (66 x 8 segments = 528 for all segments)
6.2 8-inch Printhead Considerations
An 8-inch Memjet printhead is simply two 4-inch printheads physically placed together. The printheads are wired together and share many common connections in order that the number of pins from a controlling chip is reduced and that the two printheads can print simultaneously. A number of details must be considered because of this.
6.2.1 Connections
Since firing of nozzles from the two printheads occurs simultaneously, the ChromapodSelect, NozzleSelect, AEnable and BEnable lines are shared. For loading the printheads with data, the 32 lines of CDataln. MDataln, YDataln and KDataln are shared, and 2 different SRClock lines are used to determine which of the two printheads is to be loaded. A single PTransfer pulse is used to transfer the loaded data into the NozzleEnable bits for both printheads. Similarly, the Tsense. Vsense. Rsense. and Wsense lines are shared, with 2 SenseEnable lines to distinguish between the two printheads. Therefore the two 4-inch printheads share all connections except SRClock and SenseEnable. These two connections are repeated, once for each printhead. The actual connections are shown here in Table 13:
Figure imgf000083_0001
line ANDed with data on CDataIn[n] selects the sense lines for segment n.
Tsense Temperature sense
Vsense Voltage sense
Rsense Resistivity sense
Wsense Width sense
Logic GND Logic ground
Logic PWR Logic power
V- Bus Actuator Ground bars
V+ Actuator Power
TOTAL 54
6.2.2 Timing
The joining of two 4-inch printheads and wiring of appropriate connections enables an 8-inch wide image to be printed as fast as a 4-inch wide image. However, there is twice as much data to transfer to the 2 printheads before the next line can be printed. Depending on the desired speed for the output image to be printed, data must be generated and transferred at appropriate speeds in order to keep up.
6.2.2.1 Example
As an example, consider the timing of printing an 8" x 12" page in 2 seconds. In order to print this page in 2 seconds, the 8-inch printhead must print 19.200 lines (12 x 1600). Rounding up to 20.000 lines in 2 seconds yields a line time of 100 μs. A single Print Cycle and a single Load Cycle must both finish within this time. In addition, a physical process external to the printhead must move the paper an appropriate amount.
From the printing point of view, the high-speed print mode allows a 4- inch printhead to print an entire line in 100 μs. Both 4-inch printheads must therefore be run in high-speed print mode to print simultaneously. Therefore 512 nozzles fire per firing pulse, thereby enabling the printing of an 8-inch line within the specified time.
The 800 SRClock pulses to both 4-inch printheads (each clock pulse transferring 32 bits) must also take place within the 100 μ line time. If both printheads are loaded simultaneously (64 data lines), the length of an SRClock pulse cannot exceed 100 μs / 800 = 125 nanoseconds, indicating that the printhead must be clocked at 8MHz. If the two printheads are loaded one at a time (32 shared data lines), the length of an SRClock pulse cannot exceed 100 μs / 1600 = 62.5 nanoseconds. The printhead must therefore be clocked at 16MHz. In both instances, the average time to calculate each bit value (for each of the 51.200 nozzles) must not exceed 100 μs / 51,200 = 2 nanoseconds. This requires a dot generator running at one of the following speeds:
500 MHz generating 1 bit (dot) per cycle 250 MHz generating 2 bits (dots) per cycle 125 MHz generating 4 bits (dots) per cycle
7 Printer Controller
7.1 Printer Controller Architecture
The printer controller consists of the iPrint central processor (ICP) chip 83. a 64MBit RDRAM 82. and the master QA chip 85. as shown in Figure 8. The ICP 83 contains a general-purpose processor 139 and a set of purpose-specific functional units controlled by the processor via the processor bus. as shown in Figure 17. Only three functional units are non- standard - the EDRL expander 140, the halftoner/compositor 141, and the printhead interface 142 which controls the Memjet printhead. Software running on the processor coordinates the various functional units to receive, expand and print pages. This is described in the next section.
The various functional units of the ICP are described in subsequent sections.
7.2 Page Expansion and Printing
Page expansion and printing proceeds as follows. A page description is received from the host via the USB interface 146 and is stored in main memory. 6MB of main memory is dedicated to page storage. This can hold two pages each not exceeding 3MB, or one page up to 6MB. If the host generates pages not exceeding 3MB, then the printer operates in streaming mode - i.e. it prints one page while receiving the next. If the host generates pages exceeding 3MB, then the printer operates in single-page mode - i.e. it receives each page and prints it before receiving the next. If the host generates pages exceeding 6MB then they are rejected by the printer. In practice the printer driver prevents this from happening.
A page consists of two parts - the bi-level black layer, and the contone layer. These are compressed in distinct formats - the bi-level black layer in EDRL format, the contone layer in JPEG format. The first stage of page expansion consists of decompressing the two layers in parallel. The bi-level layer is decompressed 16 by the EDRL expander unit 140. the contone layer 14 by the JPEG decoder 143.
The second stage of page expansion consists of halftoning 15 the contone CMYK data to bi-level CMYK, and then compositing 17 the bi-level black layer over the bi-level CMYK layer. The halftoning and compositing is carried out by the halftoner/compositor unit 141.
Finally, the composited' bi-level CMYK image is printed 18 via the printhead interface unit 142. which controls the Memjet printhead. Because the Memjet printhead prints at high speed, the paper must move past the printhead at a constant velocity. If the paper is stopped because data can't be fed to the printhead fast enough, then visible printing irregularities will occur. It is therefore important to transfer bi-level CMYK data to the printhead interface at the required rate.
A fully-expanded 1600 dpi bi-level CMYK page has a size of 114.3MB. Because it is impractical to store an expanded page in printer memory, each page is expanded in real time during printing. Thus the various stages of page expansion and printing are pipelined. The page expansion and printing data flow is described in Table 14. The aggregate traffic to/from main memory of
174MB/s is well within the capabilities of current technologies such as Rambus.
Figure imgf000088_0001
Each stage communicates with the next via a shared FIFO in main memory. Each FIFO is organised into lines, and the minimum size (in lines) of each FIFO is designed to accommodate the output window (in lines) of the producer and the input window (in lines) of the consumer. The inter-stage main memory buffers are described in Table 15. The aggregate buffer space usage of 6.3MB leaves 1.7MB free for program code and scratch memory (out of the 8MB available).
Figure imgf000089_0001
The overall data flow, including FIFOs, is illustrated in Figure 18. Contone page decompression is carried out by the JPEG decoder 143. Bi-level page decompression is carried out by the EDRL expander 140. Halftoning and compositing is carried out by the halftoner/compositor unit 141. These functional units are described in the following sections.
7.2.1 DMA Approach
Each functional unit contains one or more on-chip input and/or output FIFOs. Each FIFO is allocated a separate channel in the multi-channel DMA controller 144. The DMA controller 144 handles single-address rather than double-address transfers, and so provides a separate request/acknowledge interface for each channel.
Each functional unit stalls gracefully whenever an input FIFO is exhausted or an output FIFO is filled.
The processor 139 programs each DMA transfer. The DMA controller 144 generates the address for each word of the transfer on request from the functional unit connected to the channel. The functional unit latches the word onto or off the data bus 145 when its request is acknowledged by the DMA controller 144. The DMA controller 144 interrupts the processor 139 when the transfer is complete, thus allowing the processor 139 to program another transfer on the same channel in a timely fashion.
In general the processor 139 will program another transfer on a channel as soon as the corresponding main memory FIFO is available (i.e. non-empty for a read, non-full for a write).
The granularity of channel servicing implemented in the DMA controller 144 depends somewhat on the latency of main memory.
7.2.2 EDRL Expander
The EDRL expander uni't (EEU) 140. shown in Figure 19, decompresses an EDRL-compressed bi-level image. The input to the EEU is an EDRL bitstream 150. The output from the EEU is a set of bi-level image lines 151, scaled horizontally from the resolution of the expanded bi-level image by an integer scale factor to 1600 dpi. Once started, the EEU proceeds until it detects an end-of-page code in the EDRL bitstream. or until it is explicitly stopped via its control register.
The EEU relies on an explicit page width to decode the bitstream. This must be written to the page width register 152 prior to starting the EEU.
The scaling of the expanded bi-level image relies on an explicit scale factor. This must be written to the scale factor register 153 prior to starting the EEU.
Figure imgf000092_0001
The EDRL compression format is described in Section 5.2.3. It represents a bi-level image in terms of its edges. Each edge in each line is coded relative to an edge in the previous line, or relative to the previous edge in the same line. No matter how it is coded, each edge is ultimately decoded to its distance from the previous edge in the same line. This distance, or runlength, is then decoded to the string of one bits or zero bits which represent the corresponding part of the image. The decompression algorithm is also defined in Section 5.2.3.2.
The EEU consists of a bitstream decoder 154. a state machine 155. edge calculation logic 156, two runlength decoders 157 and 158. and a runlength (re)encoder 159.
The bitstream decoder 154 decodes an entropy-coded codeword from the bitstream and passes it to the state machine 155. The state machine 155 returns the size of the codeword to the bitstream decoder 154, which allows the decoder 154 to advance to the next codeword. In the case of a create edge code, the state machine 155 uses the bitstream decoder to extract the corresponding runlength from the bitstream. The state machine controls the edge calculation logic and runlength decoding/encoding as defined in Table
18. The edge calculation logic is quite simple. The current edge offset in the previous (reference) and current (coding) lines are maintained in the reference edge register 160 and edge register 161 respectively. The runlength associated with a create edge code is output directly to the runlength decoders, and is added to the current edge. A delta code is translated into a runlength by adding the associated delta to the reference edge and subtracting the current edge. The generated runlength is output to the runlength decoders, and is added to the current edge. The next runlength is extracted from the runlength encoder 159 and added to the reference edge 160. A kill edge code simply causes the current reference edge to be skipped.
Again the next runlength is extracted from the runlength encoder and added to the reference edge.
Each time the edge calculation logic 156 generates a runlength representing an edge, it is passed to the runlength decoders. While the runlength decoder decodes the run it generates a stall signal to the state machine. Since the runlength decoder 157 is slower than the edge calculation logic, there's not much point in decoupling it. The expanded line accumulates in a line buffer 162 large enough to hold an 8" 800 dpi line (800 bytes). The previously expanded line is also buffered 163. It acts as a reference for the decoding of the current line. The previous line is re-encoded as runlengths on demand. This is less expensive than buffering the decoded runlengths of the previous line, since the worst case is one 13-bit runlength for each pixel (20KB at 1600 dpi). While the runlength encoder 159 encodes the run it generates a stall signal to the state machine. The runlength encoder uses the page width 152 to detect end-of-line. The (current) line buffer 162 and the previous line buffer 163 are concatenated and managed as a single FIFO to simplify the runlength' encoder 159.
Runlength decoder 158 decodes the output runlength to a line buffer 164 large enough to hold an 8" 1600 dpi line (1600 bytes). The runlength passed to this output runlength decoder is multiplied by the scale factor 153, so this decoder produces 1600 dpi lines. The line is output scale factor times through the output pixel FIFO 165. This achieves the required vertical scaling by simple line replication. The EEU could be designed with edge smoothing integrated into its image scaling. A simple smoothing scheme based on template-matching can be very effective [10]. This would require a multi-line buffer between the low-resolution runlength decoder and the smooth scaling unit, but would eliminate the high-resolution runlength decoder.
7.2.2.1 EDRL Stream Decoder
The EDRL stream decoder 154, illustrated in Figure 20, decodes entropy-coded EDRL codewords in the input bitstream. It uses a two-byte input buffer 167 viewed through a 16-bit barrel shifter 168 whose left (most significant) edge is always aligned to a codeword boundary in the bitstream. The decoder 169 connected to the barrel shifter 168 decodes a codeword according to Table 17. and supplies the state machine 155 with the corresponding code.
Figure imgf000095_0001
The state machine 155 in turn outputs the length of the code. This is added 170, modulo-8, to the current codeword bit offset to yield the next codeword bit offset. The bit offset in turn controls the barrel shifter 168. If the codeword bit offset wraps,, then the carry bit controls the latching of the next byte from the input FIFO 166. At this time byte 2 is latched to byte 1, and the FIFO output is latched to byte 2. It takes two cycles of length 8 to fill the input buffer. This is handled by starting states in the state machine 155. 7.2.2.2 EDRL Expander State Machine
The EDRL expander state machine 155 controls the edge calculation and runlength expansion logic in response to codes supplied by the EDRL stream decoder 154. It supplies the EDRL stream decoder with the length of the current codeword and supplies the edge calculation logic with the delta value associated with the current delta code. The state machine also responds to start and stop control signals from the control register, and the end-of-line (EOL) signal from the edge calculation logic.
The state machine also controls the multi-cycle fetch of the runlength associated with a create edge code.
Figure imgf000097_0001
7.2.2.3 Runlength Decoder
The runlength decoder 157/158, shown in Figure 21, expands a runlength into a sequence of zero bits or one bits of the corresponding length in the output stream. The first run in a line is assumed to be white (color 0). Each run is assumed to be of the opposite color to its predecessor. If the first run is actually black (color 1), then it must be preceded by a zero-length white run. The runlength decoder keeps track of the current color internally.
The runlength decoder appends a maximum of 8 bits to the output stream every clock. Runlengths are typically not an integer multiple of 8, and so runs other than the first in an image are typically not byte-aligned. The run decoder maintains, in the byte space register 180, the number of bits available in the byte currently being built. This is initialised to 8 at the beginning of decoding, and on the output of every byte.
The decoder starts outputting a run of bits as soon as the next run line latches a non-zero value into the runlength register 181. The decoder effectively stalls when the runlength register goes to zero.
A number of bits of the current color are shifted into the output byte register 182 each clock. The current color is maintained in the 1-bit color register 183. The number of bits actually output is limited by the number of bits left in the runlength. and by the number of spare bits left in the output byte. The number of bits output is subtracted from the runlength and the byte space. When the runlength goes to zero it has been completely decoded, although the trailing bits of the run may still be in the output byte register, pending output. When the byte space goes to zero the output byte is full and is appended to the output stream.
The 16-bit barrel shifter 184. the output byte register 182 and the color register 183 together implement an 8-bit shift register which can be shifted multiple bit positions every clock, with the color as the serial input.
The external reset line is used to reset the runlength decoder at the start of a line. The external next run line is used to request the decoding of a new runlength. It is accompanied by a runlength on the external runlength lines. The next run line should not be set on the same clock as the reset line. Because next run inverts the current color, the reset of the color sets it to one, not zero. The external flush line is used to flush the last byte of the run, if incomplete. It can be used on a line-by-line basis to yield byte-aligned lines, or on an image basis to yield a byte-aligned image.
The external ready line indicates whether the runlength decoder is ready to decode a runlength. It can be used to stall the external logic.
7.2.2.4 Runlength Encoder
The runlength encoder 159. shown in Figure 22, detects a run of zero or one bits in the input stream. The first run in a line is assumed to be white (color 0). Each run is assumed to be of the opposite color to its predecessor. If the first run is actually black (color 1), then the runlength encoder generates a zero-length white run at the start of the line. The runlength decoder keeps track of the current color internally.
The runlength encoder reads a maximum of 8 bits from the input stream every clock. It uses a two-byte input buffer 190 viewed through a 16- bit barrel shifter 191 whose left (most significant) edge is always aligned to the current position in the bitstream. The encoder 192 connected to the barrel shifter encodes an 8-bit (partial) runlength according to Table 19. The encoder 192 uses the current color to recognise runs of the appropriate color. The 8-bit runlength generated by the 8-bit runlength encoder is added to the value in the runlength register 193. When the 8-bit runlength encoder recognises the end of the current run it generates an end-of-run signal which is latched by the ready register 194. The output of the ready register 194 indicates that the encoder has completed encoding the current runlength, accumulated in the runlength register 193. The output of the ready register 194 is also used to stall the 8-bit runlength encoder 192. When stalled the 8- bit runlength encoder 192 outputs a zero-length run and a zero end-of-run signal, effectively stalling the entire runlength encoder.
Figure imgf000100_0001
The output of the 8-bit runlength encoder 192 is limited by the remaining page width. The actual 8-bit runlength is subtracted from the remaining page width, and is added 195 to the modulo-8 bit position used to control the barrel shifter 191 and clock the byte stream input. The external reset line is used to reset the runlength encoder at the start of a line. It resets the current color and latches the page width into the page width register. The external next run line is used to request another runlength from the runlength encoder. It inverts the current color, and resets the runlength register and ready register. The external flush line is used to flush the last byte of the run, if incomplete. It can be used on a line-by-line basis to process byte-aligned lines, or on an image basis to process a byte- aligned image.
The external ready line indicates that the runlength encoder is ready to encode a runlength. and that the current runlength is available on the runlength lines. It can be used to stall the external logic.
7.2.3 JPEG Decoder
The JPEG decoder 143. shown in Figure 23. decompresses a JPEG- compressed CMYK contone image.
The input to the JPEG decoder is a JPEG bitstream. The output from the JPEG decoder is a set of contone CMYK image lines.
When decompressing, the JPEG decoder writes its output in the form of 8x8 pixel blocks. These are sometimes converted to full-width lines via an page width x 8 strip buffer closely coupled with the codec. This would require a 67KB buffer. We instead use 8 parallel pixel FIFOs with shared bus access and 8 corresponding DMA channels, as shown in Figure 23.
7.2.4 Halftoner/Compositor The halftoner/compositor unit (HCU) 141. shown in Figure 24, combines the functions of halftoning the contone CMYK layer to bi-level CMYK, and compositing the black layer over the halftoned contone layer. The input to the HCU is' an expanded 267 ppi CMYK contone layer 200, and an expanded 1600 dpi black layer 201. The output from the HCU is a set of 1600 dpi bi-level CMYK image lines 202. Once started, the HCU proceeds until it detects an end-of-page condition, or until it is explicitly stopped via its control register.
The HCU generates a page of dots of a specified width and length. The width and length must be written to the page width and page length registers prior to starting the HCU. The page width corresponds to the width of the printhead 171. The page length corresponds to the length of the target page.
The HCU generates target page data between specified left and right margins relative to the page width. The positions of the left and right margins must be written to the left margin and right margin registers prior to starting the HCU. The distance from the left margin to the right margin corresponds to the target page width.
The HCU consumes black and contone data according to specified black 172 and contone 173 page widths. These page widths must be written to the black page width and contone page width registers prior to starting the HCU. The HCU clips black and contone data to the target page width 174.
This allows the black and contone page widths to exceed the target page width without requiring any special end-of-line logic at the input FIFO level.
The relationships between the page width 171. the black 172 and contone 173 page widths, and the margins are illustrated in Figure 25. The HCU scales contone data to printer resolution both horizontally and vertically based on a specified scale factor. This scale factor must be written to the contone scale factor register prior to starting the HCU.
Figure imgf000102_0001
Figure imgf000103_0001
The consumer of the data produced by the HCU is the printhead interface. The printhead interface requires bi-level CMYK image data in planar format, i.e. with the color planes separated. Further, it also requires that even and odd pixels are separated. The output stage of the HCU therefore uses 8 parallel pixel FIFOs, one each for even cyan, odd cyan, even magenta, odd magenta, even yellow, odd yellow, even black, and odd black.
The input contone CMYK FIFO is a full 8KB line buffer. The line is used contone scale factor times to effect vertical up-scaling via line replication. FIFO write address wrapping is disabled until the start of the last use of the line. An alternative is to read the line from main memory contone scale factor times, increasing memory traffic by 65MB/s, but avoiding the need for the on-chip 8KB line buffer.
7.2.4.1 Multi-Threshold Dither
A general 256-layer dither volume provides great flexibility in dither cell design, by decoupling different intensity levels. General dither volumes can be large - a 64x 64x 256 dither volume, for example, has a size of 128KB. They are also inefficient to access since each color component requires the retrieval of a different bit from the volume. In practice, there is no need to fully decouple each layer of the dither volume. Each dot column of the volume can be implemented as a fixed set of thresholds rather than 256 separate bits. Using three 8-bit thresholds, for example, only consumes 24 bits. Now, n thresholds define n + 1 intensity intervals, within which the corresponding dither cell location is alternately not set or set. The contone pixel value being dithered uniquely selects one of the n + 1 intervals, and this determines the value of the corresponding output dot.
We dither the contone data using a triple-threshold 64x64x3x8-bit (12KB) dither volume. The three thresholds form a convenient 24-bit value which can be retrieved from the dither cell ROM in one cycle. If dither cell registration is desired between color planes, then the same triple-threshold value can be retrieved once and used to dither each color component. If dither cell registration is not desired, then the dither cell can be split into four sub-cells and stored in four separately addressable ROMs from which four different triple-threshold values can be retrieved in parallel in one cycle. Using the addressing scheme shown in Figure 26, the four color planes share the same dither cell at vertical and/or horizontal offsets of 32 dots from each other.
The Multi-threshold dither 203 is shown in Figure 26. The triple- threshold unit 204 converts a triple-threshold value and an intensity value into an interval and thence a one or zero bit. The triple-thresholding rules are shown in Table 21. The corresponding logic 208 is shown in Figure 27.
Referring to Figure 26 in more detail, four separate triple threshold units indicated generally at 204 each receive a series of contone color pixel values for respective color components of the CMYK signal. The dither volume is split into four dither subcells A. B, C and D. indicated generally at
205. A dither cell address generator 206 and four gates indicated generally at 207, control the retrieval of the four different triple threshold values which can be retrieved in parallel in one cycle for the different colors.
TABLE 21 Triple-thresholding rules
Figure imgf000105_0001
7.2.4.2 Composite
The composite unit 205 composites a black layer dot over a halftoned CMYK layer dot. If the black layer opacity is one, then the halftoned CMY is set to zero.
Given a 4-bit halftoned color CCMCYCKC and a 1-bit black layer opacity Kb, the composite and clip logic is as defined in Table 22.
Figure imgf000105_0002
7.2.4.3 Clock Enable Generator
The clock enable generator 206 generates enable signals for clocking the contone CMYK pixel input, the black dot input, and the CMYK dot output.
As described earlier, the contone pixel input buffer is used as both a line buffer and a FIFO. Each line is read once and then used contone scale factor times. FIFO write address wrapping is disabled until the start of the final replicated use of the line, at which time the clock enable generator generates a contone line advance enable signal which enables wrapping.
The clock enable generator also generates an even signal which is used to select the even or odd set of output dot FIFOs, and a margin signal which is used to generate white dots when the current dot position is in the left or right margin of the page.
The clock enable generator uses a set of counters. The internal logic of the counters is defined in Table 23. The logic of the clock enable signals is defined in Table 24.
Figure imgf000107_0001
Figure imgf000108_0001
7.3 Printhead Interface
The printhead interface (PHI) 142 is the means by which the processor loads the Memjet printhead with the dots to be printed, and controls the actual dot printing process. The PHI contains:
• a line loader/format unit (LLFU) 209 which loads the dots for a given print line into local buffer storage and formats them into the order required for the Memjet printhead. • a Memjet interface (MJI) 210, which transfers data to the Memjet printhead 63. and controls the nozzle firing sequences during a print. The units within the PHI are controlled by a number of registers that are programmed by the processor 139. In addition, the processor is responsible for setting up the appropriate parameters in the DMA controller 144 for the transfers from memory to the LLFU. This includes loading white
(all O's) into appropriate colors during the start and end of a page so that the page has clean edges. The internal structure of the Printhead Interface 142 is shown in Figure 28. 7.3.1 Line Loader/Format Unit
The line loader/format unit (LLFU) 209 loads the dots for a given print line into local buffer storage and formats them into the order required for the Memjet printhead. It is responsible for supplying the pre-calculated nozzleEnable bits to the Memjet interface for the eventual printing of the page.
A single line in the 8-inch printhead consists of 12.800 4-color dots. At 1 bit per color, a single print line consists of 51,200 bits. These bits must be supplied in the correct order for being sent on to the printhead. See Section 6.1.2.1 for more information concerning the Load Cycle dot loading order, but in summary. 32 bits are transferred at a time to each of the two 4-inch printheads. with the 32 bits representing 4 dots for each of the 8 segments.
The printing uses a double buffering scheme for preparing and accessing the dot-bit information. While one line is being loaded into the first buffer 213, the pre-loaded line in the second buffer 214 is being read in
Memjet dot order. Once the entire line has been transferred from the second buffer 214 to the printhead via the Memjet interface, the reading and writing processes swap buffers. The first buffer 213 is now read and the second buffer is loaded up with the new line of data. This is repeated throughout the printing process, as can be seen in the conceptual overview of Figure 29
The actual implementation of the LLFU is shown in Figure 30. Since one buffer is being read from while the other is being written to. two sets of address lines must be used. The 32-bits Dataln from the common data bus are loaded depending on the WriteEnables. which are generated by the State Machine in response to the DMA Acknowledges.
A multiplexor 215 chooses between the two 4-bit outputs of Buffer 0. 213 and Buffer 1. 214. and sends the result to an 8-entry by 4-bit shift register 216. After the first 8 read cycles, and whenever an Advance pulse comes from the MJI, the current 32-bit value from the shift register is gated into the 32-bit Transfer register 217, where it can be used by the MJI. 7.3.1.1 Buffers
Each of the two buffers 213 and 214 is broken into 4 sub-buffers 220. 221. 222 and 223. 1 per color. All the even dots are placed before the odd dots in each color's buffer, as shown in Figure 31.
The 51,200 bits representing the dots in the next line to be printed are stored 12.800 bits per color buffer, stored as 400 32-bit words. The first 200 32-bit words (6400 bits) represent the even dots for the color, while the second 200 32-bit words (6400 bits) represent the odd dots for the color. The addressing decoding circuitry is such that in a given cycle, a single
32-bit access can be made to all 4 sub-buffers - either a read from all 4 or a write to one of the 4. Only one bit of the 32-bits read from each color buffer is selected, for a total of 4 output bits. The process is shown in Figure 32. 13 bits of address allow the reading of a particular bit by means of 8-bits of address being used to select 32 bits, and 5-bits of address choose 1-bit from those 32. Since all color buffers share this logic, a single 13-bit address gives a total of 4 bits out, one per color. Each buffer has its own WriteEnable line, to allow a single 32-bit value to be written to a particular color buffer in a given cycle. The 32-bits of Dataln are shared, since only one buffer will actually clock the data in.
7.3.1.2 Address Generation 7.3.1.2.1 Reading
Address Generation for reading is straightforward. Each cycle we generate a bit address which is used to fetch 4 bits representing 1-bit per color for the particular segment. By adding 400 to the current bit address, we advance to the next segment's equivalent dot. We add 400 (not 800) since the odd and even dots are separated in the buffer. We do this 16 times to retrieve the two sets of 32 bits for the two sets of 8 segments representing the even dots (the resultant data is transferred to the MJI 32 bits at a time) and another 16 times to load the odd dots. This 32-cycle process is repeated 400 times, incrementing the start address each time. Thus in 400 x 32 cycles, a total of 400 x 32 x 4 (51.200) dot values are transferred in the order required by the printhead. In addition, we generate the TransferWriteEnable control signal. Since the LLFU starts before the MJI, we must transfer the first value before the Advance pulse from the MJI. We must also generate the next 32-bit value in readiness for the first Advance pulse. The solution is to transfer the first 32- bit value to the Transfer register after 8 cycles, and then to stall 8-cycles later, waiting for the Advance pulse to start the next 8-cycle group. Once the first Advance pulse arrives, the LLFU is synchronized to the MJI. However, the MJI must be started at least 16 cycles after the LLFU so that the initial Transfer value is valid and the next 32-bit value is ready to be loaded into the Transfer register. The read process is shown in the following pseudocode:
DotCount = 0
For DotlnSegmentO = 0 to 400 CurrAdr = DotlnSegmentO Do VI = (CurrAdr =0) OR (CurrAdr = 3200)
V2 = Low 3 bits of DotCount = 0 TransferWriteEnable = VI OR ADVANCE Stall = V2 AND (NOT TransferWriteEnable) If (NOT Stall) Shift Register=Fetch 4-bits from CurrReadBuffer:CurrAdr
CurrAdr = CurrAdr + 400
DotCount = (DotCount + 1) MOD 32 (odd&even, printheads 1&2, segments 0-7) Endlf Until (DotCount=0) AND (NOT Stall)
EndFor
Once the line has finished, the CurrReadBuffer value must be toggled by the processor.
7.3.1.2.2 Writing
The write process is also straightforward. 4 DMA request lines are output to the DMA controller. As requests are satisfied by the return DMA Acknowledge lines, the appropriate 8-bit destination address is selected (the lower 5 bits of the 13-bit output address are don't care values) and the acknowledge signal is passed to the correct buffer's WriteEnable control line (the Current Write Buffer is CurrentReadBuffer). The 8-bit destination address is selected from the 4 current addresses, one address per color. As DMA requests are satisfied the appropriate destination address is incremented, and the corresponding TransfersRemaining counter is decremented. The DMA request line is only set when the number of transfers remaining for that color is non-zero.
The following pseudocode illustrates the Write process:
CurrentAdr[0-3] = 0
While (TransfersRemaining[0-3] are all non-zero) DMARequest[0-3] = TransfersRemaining[0-3] ! = 0 If DMAAknowledge[N]
CurrWriteBuffer:CurrentAdr[N] = Fetch 32-bits from data bus CurrentAdr[N] = CurrentAdr[N] + 1
TransfersRemaining [N] = TransfersRemainingfN] - 1 (floor 0) Endlf EndWhile
7.3.1.3 Registers
The following registers are contained in the LLFU:
Figure imgf000114_0001
7.3.2 Memjet Interface
The Memjet interface (MJI) 211 transfers data to the Memjet printhead 63. and controls the nozzle firing sequences during a print.
The MJI is simply a State Machine (see Figure 28) which follows the Printhead loading and firing order described in Section 6.1.2, and includes the functionality of the Preheat Cycle and Cleaning Cycle as described in Section 6.1.4 and Section 6.1.5. Both high-speed and low-speed printing modes are available. Dot counts for each color are also kept by the MJI.
The MJI loads data into the printhead from a choice of 2 data sources:
All Is. This means that all nozzles will fire during a subsequent Print cycle, and is the standard mechanism for loading the printhead for a preheat or cleaning cycle.
From the 32-bit input held in the Transfer register of the LLFU. This is the standard means of printing an image. The 32-bit value from the LLFU is directly sent to the printhead and a 1-bit 'Advance' control pulse is sent to the LLFU. At the end of each line, a 1-bit 'AdvanceLine' pulse is also available.
The MJI must be started after the LLFU has already prepared the first 32-bit transfer value. This is so the 32-bit data input will be valid for the first transfer to the printhead.
The MJI is therefore directly connected to the LLFU and the external Memjet printhead.
7.3.2.1 Connections to Printhead
The MJI 211 has the following connections to the printhead 63. with the sense of input and output with respect to the MJI. The names match the pin connections on the printhead (see Section 6.2.1 for an explanation of the way the 8-inch printhead is wired up).
Figure imgf000116_0001
Figure imgf000117_0001
Figure imgf000118_0001
7.3.2.2 Firing Pulse Duration
The duration of firing pulses on the AEnable and BEnable lines depend on the viscosity of the ink (which is dependant on temperature and ink characteristics) and the amount of power available to the printhead. The typical pulse duration range is 1.3 to 1.8 μs. The MJI therefore contains a programmable pulse duration table 230, indexed by feedback from the printhead. The table of pulse durations allows the use of a lower cost power supply, and aids in maintaining more accurate drop ejection.
The Pulse Duration table has 256 entries, and is indexed by the current Vsense 231 and Tsense 232 settings. The upper 4-bits of address come from Vsense. and the lower 4-bits of address come from Tsense. Each entry is 8- bits. and represents a fixed point value in the range of 0-4 μs. The process of generating the AEnable and BEnable lines is shown in Figure 33. The analog
Vsense 231 and Tsense 232 signals are received by respective sample and hold circuits 233 and 234. and then converted to digital words in respective converters 235 and 236. before being applied to the pulse duration table 230. The output of the pulse duration table 230 is applied to a pulse width generator 237 to generate the firing pulses.
The 256-byte table is written by the CPU before printing the first page. The table may be updated in between pages if desired. Each 8-bit pulse duration entry in the table combines:
• User brightness settings (from the page description) • Viscosity curve of ink (from the QA Chip)
• Rsense
• Wsense • Vsense
• Tsense
7.3.2.3 Dot Counts The MJI 211 maintains a count of the number of dots of each color fired from the printhead in a dot count register 240. The dot count for each color is a 32-bit value, individually cleared, by a signal 241, under processor control. At 32-bits length, each dot count can hold a maximum coverage dot count of 17 12-inch pages, although in typical usage, the dot count will be read and cleared after each page.
The dot counts are used by the processor to update the QA chip 85 (see Section 7.5.4.1) in order to predict when the ink cartridge runs out of ink. The processor knows the volume of ink in the cartridge for each of C, M, Y, and K from the QA chip. Counting the number of drops eliminates the need for ink sensors, and prevents the ink channels from running dry. An updated drop count is written to the QA chip after each page. A new page will not be printed unless there is enough ink left, and allows the user to change the ink without getting a dud half-printed page which must be reprinted.
The layout of the dot counter for cyan is shown in Figure 34. The remaining 3 dot counters (MDotCount. YDotCount. and KDotCount for magenta, yellow, and black respectively) are identical in structure.
7.3.2.4 Registers
The processor 139 communicates with the MJI 211 via a register set. The registers allow the processor to parameterize a print as well as receive feedback about print progress.
The following registers are contained in the MJI:
Figure imgf000120_0001
Figure imgf000121_0001
The MJI's Status Register is a 16-bit register with bit interpretations as follows:
Figure imgf000122_0001
7.3.2.5 Preheat and Cleaning Cycles
The Cleaning and Preheat cycles are simply accomplished by setting appropriate registers:
• SetAllNozzles = 1
• Set the PulseDuration register to either a low duration (in the case of the preheat mode) or to an appropriate drop ejection duration for cleaning mode.
• Set NumLines to be the number of times the nozzles should be fired • Set the Go bit and then wait for the Go bit to be cleared when the print cycles have completed.
7.4 Processor and Memory 7.4.1 Processor
The processor 139 runs the control program which synchronises the other functional units during page reception, expansion and printing. It also runs the device drivers for the various external interfaces, and responds to user actions through the user interface.
It must have low interrupt latency, to provide efficient DMA management, but otherwise does not need to be particularly high- performance DMA Controller.
The DMA controller supports single-address transfers on 27 channels (see Table 29). It generates vectored interrupts to the processor on transfer completion.
Figure imgf000123_0001
7.4.3 Program ROM
The program ROM holds the ICP control program which is loaded into main memory during system boot.
7.4.4 Rambus Interface
The Rambus interface provides the high-speed interface to the external 8MB (64Mbit) Rambus DRAM (RDRAM).
7.5 External Interfaces 7.5.1 USB Interface
The Universal Serial Bus (USB) interface provides a standard USB device interface.
7.5.2 Speaker Interface The speaker interface 250 (Figure 35) contains a small FIFO 251 used for DMA-mediated transfers of sound clips from main memory, an 8-bit digital-to-analog converter (DAC) 252 which converts each 8-bit sample value to a voltage, and an amplifier 253 which feeds the external speaker. When the FIFO is empty it outputs a zero value. The speaker interface is clocked at the frequency of the sound clips.
The processor outputs a sound clip to the speaker simply by programming the DMA channel of the speaker interface.
7.5.3 Parallel Interface
The parallel interface 231 provides I/O on a number of parallel external signal lines. It allows the processor to sense or control the devices listed in Table 30. TABLE 30Parallel Interface devices parallel interface devices power button paper feed button power LED out-of-paper LED ink low LED media sensor paper transport stepper motor
7.5.4 Serial Interface
The serial interface 232 provides two standard low-speed serial ports.
One port is used to connect to the master QA chip 85. The other is used to connect to the QA chip in the ink cartridge 233. The processor- mediated protocol between the two is used to authenticate the ink cartridge. The processor can then retrieve ink characteristics from the QA chip, as well as the remaining volume of each ink. The processor uses the ink characteristics to properly configure the Memjet printhead. It uses the remaining ink volumes, updated on a page-by-page basis with ink consumption information accumulated by the printhead interface, to ensure that it never allows the printhead to be damaged by running dry.
7.5.4.1 Ink Cartridge QA Chip The QA chip 233 in the ink cartridge contains information required for maintaining the best possible print quality, and is implemented using an authentication chip. The 256 bits of data in the authentication chip are allocated as follows:
Figure imgf000126_0001
Before each page is printed, the processor must check the amount of ink remaining to ensure there is enough for an entire worst-case page. Once the page has been printed, the processor multiplies the total number of drops of each color (obtained from the printhead interface) by the drop volume. The amount of printed ink is subtracted from the amount of ink remaining. The unit of measurement for ink remaining is nanolitres. so 32 bits can represent over 4 litres of ink. The amount of ink used for a page must be rounded up to the nearest nanolitre (i.e. approximately 1000 printed dots).
7.5.5 JTAG Interface
A standard JTAG (Joint Test Action Group) interface is included for testing purposes. Due to the complexity of the chip, a variety of testing techniques are required, including BIST (Built In Self Test) and functional block isolation. An overhead of 10% in chip area is assumed for overall chip testing circuitry.
8 Generic Printer Driver
This section describes generic aspects of any host-based printer driver for iPrint.
8.1 Graphics and Imaging Model We assume that the printer driver is closely coupled with the host graphics system, so that the printer driver can provide device-specific handling for different graphics and imaging operations, in particular compositing operations and text operations.
We assume that the host provides support for color management, so that device-independent color can be converted to iPrint-specific CMYK color in a standard way, based on a user-selected iPrint-specific ICC (International Color Consortium) color profile. The color profile is normally selected implicitly by the user when the user specifies the output medium in the printer (i.e. plain paper, coated paper, transparency, etc.). The page description sent to the printer always contains device-specific CMYK color.
We assume that the host graphics system renders images and graphics to a nominal resolution specified by the printer driver, but that it allows the printer driver to take control of rendering text. In particular, the graphics system provides sufficient information to the printer driver to allow it to render and position text at a higher resolution than the nominal device resolution.
We assume that the host graphics system requires random access to a contone page buffer at the nominal device resolution, into which it composites graphics and imaging objects, but that it allows the printer driver to take control of the actual compositing - i.e. it expects the printer driver to manage the page buffer.
8.2 Two-Layer Page Buffer The printer's page description contains a 267 ppi contone layer and an
800 dpi black layer. The black layer is conceptually above the contone layer, i.e. the black layer is composited over the contone layer by the printer. The printer driver therefore maintains a page buffer 260 which correspondingly contains a medium- resolution contone layer 261 and a high-resolution black layer 262.
The graphics systems renders and composites objects into the page buffer bottom-up - i.e. later objects obscure earlier objects. This works naturally when there is only a single layer, but not when there are two layers which will be composited later. It is therefore necessary to detect when an object being placed on the contone layer obscures something on the black layer.
When obscuration is detected, the obscured black pixels are composited with the contone layer and removed from the black layer. The obscuring object is then laid down on the contone layer, possibly interacting with the black pixels in some way. If the compositing mode of the obscuring object is such that no interaction with the background is possible, then the black pixels can simply be discarded without being composited with the contone layer. In practice, of course, there is little interaction between the contone layer and the black layer. The printer driver specifies a nominal page resolution of 267 ppi to the graphics system. Where possible the printer driver relies on the graphics system to render image and graphics objects to the pixel level at 267 ppi, with the exception of black text. The printer driver fields all text rendering requests, detects and renders black text at 800 dpi, but returns non-black text rendering requests to the graphics system for rendering at 267 ppi. Ideally the graphics system and the printer driver manipulate color in device-independent RGB, deferring conversion to device-specific CMYK until the page is complete and ready to be sent to the printer. This reduces page buffer requirements and makes compositing more rational. Compositing in CMYK color space is not ideal.
Ultimately the graphics system asks the printer driver to composite each rendered object into the printer driver's page buffer. Each such object uses 24-bit contone RGB. and has an explicit (or implicitly opaque) opacity channel. The printer driver maintains the two-layer page buffer 260 in three parts. The first part is the medium-resolution (267 ppi) contone layer 261. This consists of a 24-bit RGB bitmap. The second part is a medium-resolution black layer 263. This consists of an 8-bit opacity bitmap. The third part is a high-resolution (800 dpi) black layer 262. This consists of a 1-bit opacity bitmap. The medium- resolution black layer is a subsampled version of the high-resolution opacity layer. In practice, assuming the medium resolution is an integer factor n of the high resolution (e.g. n = 800 / 267 = 3), each medium-resolution opacity value is obtained by averaging the corresponding n x n high-resolution opacity values. This corresponds to box-filtered subsampling. The subsampling of the black pixels effectively antialiases edges in the high-resolution black layer, thereby reducing ringing artefacts when the contone layer is subsequently JPEG-compressed and decompressed. The structure and size of the page buffer is illustrated in Figure 36.
8.3 Compositing Model
For the purposes of discussing the page buffer compositing model, we define the following variables.
Figure imgf000130_0002
When a black object of opacity άTxH is composited with the black layer, the black layer is updated as follows:
O-F8H[X> V] <- aFgHix> v] v o.TxH[x, y] (Rule 1)
-F8M[X' y] < 55 a M + 1> ny + ϊ (Rule 2)
Figure imgf000130_0001
The object opacity is simply ored with the black layer opacity (Rule 1), and the corresponding part of the medium-resolution black layer is recomputed from the high-resolution black layer (Rule 2).
When a contone object of color CobM and opacity a0bM i-3 composited with the contone layer, the contone layer and the black layer are updated as follows: Cβgj /t . y <~ BgM[x> 7l(l - aFgM[x, y]) if aobM[x, y] > 0 (Rule 3) a FgMix> y] <- 0 if aobM[x, y] > 0 (Rule 4) a FgH\x> y] <- 0 if aobM[x I n. y I n] > 0 (Rule 5)
Cflg tø yl <- CBgMlx> y](l - αotM[* 7]) + C0bM[x. y]a0bM[χ, v] (Rule 6)
Wherever the contone object obscures the black layer, even if not fully opaquely, the affected black layer pixels are pushed from the black layer to the contone layer, i.e. composited with the contone layer (Rule 3) and removed from the black layer (Rule 4 and Rule 5). The contone object is then composited with the contone layer (Rule 6).
If a contone object pixel is fully opaque [i.e.aobM[x, y] = 255), then there is no need to push the corresponding black pixels into the background contone layer (Rule 3), since the background contone pixel will subsequently be completely obliterated by the foreground contone pixel (Rule 6). Figures 37 to 41 illustrate the effect on the foreground black layer and the background contone layer of compositing objects of various types onto the image represented by the two layers. In each case the state of the two layers is shown before and after the object is composited. The different resolutions of the foreground and background layers are indicated by the layers' different pixel grid densities.
The output image represented to the two layers is shown without a pixel grid, since the actual rendering of the image is not the focus of discussion here.
The medium-resolution foreground black layer is not illustrated, but is implicitly present. Whenever Rule 1 is applied to the high-resolution foreground black layer. Rule 2 is implicitly applied to the medium-resolution foreground black layer. Whenever Rule 4 is applied. Rule 5 is also implicitly applied.
Figure 37 illustrates the effect of compositing a black object 270 onto a white image. The black object is simply composited into the foreground black layer 271 (Rule 1). The background contone layer 272 is unaffected, and the output image 273 is the black object.
Figure 38 illustrates the effect of compositing a contone object 280 onto a white image. The contone object 280 is simply composited into the background contone layer 282 (Rule 6). The foreground black layer 281 is unaffected, and the output image 283 is the contone object.
Figure 39 illustrates the effect of compositing a black object 290 onto an image already containing a contone object 292. Again the black object is simply composited into the foreground black layer 291 (Rule 1). The background contone layer is unaffected, and the output image 293 has the black object 290 over the contone object 292.
Figure 40 illustrates the effect of compositing an opaque contone object 300 onto an image already containing a black object 301. Since the contone object obscures part of the existing black object, the affected parts of the existing bi-level object are removed from the foreground black layer 302
(Rule 4). There is no need to composite the affected parts into the contone layer because the contone object is fully opaque, and Rule 3 is therefore skipped. The contone object is composited into the background contone layer as usual 303 (Rule 6). and the output image 304 shows the contone object 300 over, and obscuring, the black object.
Figure 41 illustrates the effect of compositing a partially transparent contone object 310 onto an image already containing a black object 311.
Since the contone object obscures part of the existing black object partially transparently, the affected parts of the black object are composited into the contone layer 312 (Rule 3). and are then removed from the foreground black layer 313 (Rule 4). The contone object is then composited into the background contone layer as usual 314 (Rule 6).
The final image 315 shows darkening of those contone pixels which transparently obscure parts of the existing black object. 8.4 Page Compression and Delivery
Once page rendering is complete, the printer driver converts the contone layer to iPrint-specific CMYK with the help of color management functions in the graphics system. The printer driver then compresses and packages the black layer and the contone layer into an iPrint page description as described in Section 5.2. This page description is delivered to the printer via the standard spooler.
Note that the black layer is manipulated as a set of 1-bit opacity values, but is delivered to the printer as a set of 1-bit black values. Although these two interpretations are different, they share the same representation, and so no data conversion is required.
9 Windows 9X/NT Printer Driver 9.1 Windows 9x/NT Printing System In the Windows 9x/NT printing system [8] [9], a printer 320 is a graphics device, and an application 321 communicates with it via the graphics device interface 322 (GDI). The printer driver graphics DLL 323 (dynamic link library) implements the device-dependent aspects of the various graphics functions provided by GDI. The spooler 333 handles the delivery of pages to the printer, and may reside on a different machine to the application requesting printing. It delivers pages to the printer via a port monitor 334 which handles the physical connection to the printer. The optional language monitor 335 is the part of the printer driver which imposes additional protocol on communication with the printer, and in particular decodes status responses from the printer on behalf of the spooler.
The printer driver user interface DLL 336 implements the user interface for editing printer-specific properties and reporting printer-specific events. The structure of the Windows 9x/NT printing system is illustrated in Figure 42. Since iPrint uses USB IEEE-1284 emulation, there is no need to implement a language monitor for iPrint.
The remainder of this section describes the design of the printer driver graphics DLL. It should be read in conjunction with the appropriate Windows 9x/NT DDK documentation [8] [9] .
9.2 Windows 9x/NT Graphics Device Interface (GDI)
GDI provides functions which allow an application to draw on a device surface, i.e. typically an abstraction of a display screen or a printed page. For a raster device, the device surface is conceptually a color bitmap. The application can draw on the surface in a device-independent way, i.e. independently of the resolution and color characteristics of the device.
The application has random access to the entire device surface. This means that if a memory-limited printer device requires banded output, then GDI must buffer the entire page's GDI commands and replay them windowed into each band in turn. Although this provides the application with great flexibility, it can adversely affect performance.
GDI supports color management, whereby device-independent colors provided by the application are transparently translated into device- dependent colors according to a standard ICC (International Color
Consortium) color profile of the device. A printer driver can activate a different color profile depending, for example, on the user's selection of paper type on the driver-managed printer property sheet.
GDI supports line and spline outline graphics (paths), images, and text. Outline graphics, including outline font glyphs, can be stroked and filled with bit- mapped brush patterns. Graphics and images can be geometrically transformed and composited with the contents of the device surface. While Windows 95/NT4 provides only boolean compositing operators, Windows 98/NT5 provides proper alpha-blending [9]. 9.3 Printer Driver Graphics DLL
A raster printer can. in theory, utilize standard printer driver components under Windows 9x/NT, and this can make the job of developing a printer driver trivial. This relies on being able to model the device surface as a single bitmap. The problem with this is that text and images must be rendered at the same resolution. This either compromises text resolution, or generates too much output data, compromising performance.
As described earlier. iPrint's approach is to render black text and images at different resolutions, to optimize the reproduction of each. The printer driver is therefore implemented according to the generic design described in Section 8.
The driver therefore maintains a two-layer three-part page buffer as described in Section 8.2, and this means that the printer driver must take over managing the device surface, which in turn means that it must mediate all GDI access to the device surface.
9.3.1 Managing the Device Surface
The printer driver must support a number of standard functions, including the following:
Figure imgf000135_0001
DrvEnablePDEV indicates to GDI, via the flGraphicsCaps member of the returned DEVINFO structure, the graphics rendering capabilities of the driver. This is discussed further below.
DrvEnableSurface creates a device surface consisting of two conceptual layers and three parts: the 267 ppi contone layer 24-bit RGB color, the 267 ppi black layer 8-bit opacity, and the 800 dpi black layer 1-bit opacity. The virtual device surface which encapsulates these two layers has a nominal resolution of 267 ppi, so this is the resolution at which GDI operations take place.
Although the aggregate page buffer requires about 33MB of memory, the PC 99 office standard [5] specifies a minimum of 64MB.
In practice, managing the device surface and mediating GDI access to it means that the printer driver must support the following additional functions:
Figure imgf000136_0001
Copying images, stroking paths and filling regions all occur on the contone layer, while rendering solid black text occurs on the bi-level black layer. Furthermore, rendering non-black text also occurs on the contone layer, since it isn't supported on the black layer. Conversely, stroking or filling with solid black can occur on the black layer (if we so choose).
Although the printer driver is obliged to hook the aforementioned functions, it can punt function calls which apply to the contone layer back to the corresponding GDI implementations of the functions, since the contone layer is a standard-format bitmap. For every DrvXxx function there is a corresponding EngXxx function provided by GDI.
As described in Section 8.2 . when an object destined for the contone layer obscures pixels on the black layer, the obscured black pixels must be transferred from the black layer to the contone layer before the contone object is composited with the contone layer. The key to this process working is that obscuration is detected and handled in the hooked call, before it is punted back to GDI. This involves determining the pixel-by-pixel opacity of the contone object from its geometry, and using this opacity to selectively transfer black pixels from the black layer to the contone layer as described in Section 8.2.
9.3.2 Determining Contone Object Geometry It is possible to determine the geometry of each contone object before it is rendered and thus determine efficiently which black pixels it obscures. In the case of DrvCopyBits and DrvPaint. the geometry is determined by a clip object (CLIPOBJ), which can be enumerated as a set of rectangles. In the case of DrvStrokePath. things are more complicated. DrvStrokePath supports both straight-line and Bezier-spline curve segments, and single-pixel-wide lines and geometric-wide lines. The first step is to avoid the complexity of Bezier-spline curve segments and geometric-wide lines altogether by clearing the corresponding capability flags (GCAPS_BEZIERS and GCAPS_GEOMETRICWIDE) in the flGraphicsCaps member of the driver's DEVINFO structure. This causes GDI to reformulate such calls as sets of simpler calls to DrvPaint. In general. GDI gives a driver the opportunity to accelerate high-level capabilities, but simulates any capabilities not provided by the driver.
What remains is simply to determine the geometry of a single-pixel- wide straight line. Such a line can be solid or cosmetic. In the latter case, the line style is determined by a styling array in the specified line attributes (LINEATTRS). The styling array specifies how the line alternates between being opaque and transparent along its length, and so supports various dashed line effects etc. When the brush is solid black, straight lines can also usefully be rendered to the black layer, though with the increased width implied by the 800 dpi resolution.
9.3.3 Rendering Text In the case of a DrvTextOut. things are also more complicated. Firstly, the opaque background, if any. is handled like any other fill on the contone layer (see DrvPaint). If the foreground brush is not black, or the mix mode is not effectively opaque, or the font is not scalable, or the font indicates outline stroking, then the call is punted to EngTextOut, to be applied to the contone layer. Before the call is punted, however, the driver determines the geometry of each glyph by obtaining its bitmap (via FONTOBJ_cGetGlyphs), and makes the usual obscuration check against the black layer.
If punting a DrvTextOut call is not allowed (the documentation is ambiguous), then the driver should disallow complex text operations. This includes disallowing outline stroking (by clearing the
GCAPS_VECTOR_FONT capability flag), and disallowing complex mix modes (by clearing the GCAPS_ARBMIXTXT capability flag).
If the foreground brush is black and opaque, and the font is scalable and not stroked, then the glyphs are rendered on the black layer. In this case the driver determines the geometry of each glyph by obtaining its outline
(again via FONTOBJ_cGetGlyphs, but as a PATHOBJ). The driver then renders each glyph from its outline at 800 dpi and writes it to the black layer. Although the outline geometry uses device coordinates (i.e. at 267 ppi), the coordinates are in fixed point format with plenty of fractional precision for higher-resolution rendering. Note that strikethrough and underline rectangles are added to the glyph geometry, if specified.
The driver must set the GCAPS_HIGHRESTEXT flag in the DEVINFO to request that glyph positions (again in 267 ppi device coordinates) be supplied by GDI in high-precision fixed-point format, to allow accurate positioning at 800 dpi. The driver must also provide an implementation of the DrvGetGlyphMode function, so that it can indicate to GDI that glyphs should be cached as outlines rather than bitmaps. Ideally the driver should cache rendered glyph bitmaps for efficiency, memory allowing. Only glyphs below a certain point size should be cached.
9.3.4 Compressing the Contone Layer
As described earlier, the contone layer is compressed using JPEG. The forward discrete cosine transform (DCT) is the costliest part of JPEG compression. In current high-quality software implementations, the forward
DCT of each 8x 8 block requires 12 integer multiplications and 32 integer additions [7], On a Pentium processor, an integer multiplication requires 10 cycles, and an integer addition requires 2 cycles [11]. This equates to a total cost per block of 184 cycles. The 25.5MB contone layer consists of 417.588 JPEG blocks, giving an overall forward DCT cost of about 77Mcycles. At 300MHz, the PC 99 desktop standard [5], this equates to 0.26 seconds, which is well within the 2 second limit per page.
10 References
[1] ANSI/EIA 538-1988. Facsimile Coding Schemes and Coding Control
Functions for Group 4 Facsimile Equipment, August 1988
[2] Humphreys. G.W.. and V. Bruce. Visual Cognition. Lawrence Erlbaum Associates. 1989, p.15
[3] IEEE Std 1284-1994. IEEE Standard Signaling Method for a Bidirectional Parallel Peripheral Interface for Personal Computers, 2 December 1994 [4] Intel Corp. and Microsoft Corp., PC 98 System Design Guide. 1997 [5] Intel Corp. and Microsoft Corp.. PC 99 System Design Guide, 1998 [6] ISO/IEC 19018-1:1994. Information technology - Digital compression and coding of continuous-tone still images: Requirements and guidelines, 1994 [7] Loeffler. C. A. Ligtenberg and G. Moschytz, "Practical Fast 1-D DCT Algorithms with 11 Multiplications". Proceedings of the International Conference on Acoustics. Speech, and Signal Processing 1989 (ICASSP '89), pp.988-991
[8] Microsoft Corp . , Microsoft Win dows NT 4.0 Device Driver Kit, 1997 [9] Microsoft Corp.. Microsoft Windows NT 5.0 Device Driver Kit. 1998 [10] Olsen. J. "Smoothing Enlarged Monochrome Images", in Glassner, A.S. (ed.). Graphics Gems. AP Professional. 1990 [11] Schmit. M.L.. Pentium Processor Optimization Tools. AP Professional.
1995
[12] Thompson, H.S., Multilingual Corpus 1 CD-ROM, European Corpus Initiative [13] Urban. S.J., "Review of standards for electronic imaging for facsimile systems". Journal of Electronic Imaging, Vol.1(1), January 1992, pp.5-21
[14] USB Implementers Forum, Universal Serial Bus Specification, Revision 1.0, 1996
[15] USB Implementers Forum. Universal Serial Bus Device Class Definition for Printer Devices. Version 1.07 Draft. 1998 [16] Wallace. G.K.. "The JPEG Still Picture Compression Standard", Communications of the ACM, 34(4), April 1991, pp.30-44 [17] Yasuda. Y.. "Overview of Digital Facsimile Coding Techniques in Japan". Proceedings of the IEEE. Vol. 68(7). July 1980. pp.830-845
It will be appreciated by persons skilled in the art that numerous variations and/or modifications may be made to the invention as shown in the specific embodiments without departing from the spirit or scope of the invention as broadly described. The present embodiments are. therefore, to be considered in all respects as illustrative and not restrictive.

Claims

CLAIMS:
1. A printer driver for a printer; said printer driver managing a two layer buffer which represents a page to be printed; the first layer of said buffer containing background contone data; the second layer of said buffer containing foreground bi-level data: said printer driver transmitting data from said buffer to said printer; said printer compositing data from said layers of said buffer: said printer driver operating such that when it determines that contone data being composited with said contone layer obscures data in said bi-level layer, said obscured bi-level data is removed from said bi-level layer and is either discarded, or in the case where there is some interaction between the image represented by said obscuring contone data and the image represented by said obscured bi-level data then said obscured bi-level data is composited with said contone layer before said obscuring contone data is composited with said contone layer.
2. A printer driver according to claim 1, where said contone layer has a lower resolution than said bi-level layer.
3. A printer driver according to claim 2. where said two layer page buffer is augmented with a third layer of contone data: said third layer containing a contone version of the bi-level data of said second layer subsampled at the resolution of said first layer; said printer driver operating such that when it determines that contone data being composited with said first layer obscures contone data in said third layer, said obscured contone data is removed from said third layer and is either discarded, or in the case where there is some interaction between the image represented by said obscuring contone data and the image represented by said obscured contone data then said obscured contone data is composited with said first layer before said obscuring contone data is composited with said first layer, and bi- level data in said second layer- which corresponds to said obscured contone data in said third layer is removed from said second layer.
4. A printer driver according to claim 1. where said interaction occurs between an image represented by said obscuring contone data and said obscured bi-level data when said contone data represents a non-opaque image object.
5. A printer driver according to claim 1, where said contone layer data is color data, and said bi-level layer data is black data.
6. A printer driver according to claim 5, where the following rules are implemented by said printer driver: when a black image object is composited with said page buffer, it is composited with said bi-level black layer; when a contone color image object is composited with said page buffer, it is composited with said contone color layer; wherever said contone image object obscures said black layer, even if not fully opaquely, obscured black layer pixels are composited with said contone layer, and removed from said black layer, before said contone object is composited with said contone layer; if a pixel of said contone object is fully opaque, then there is no need to composite corresponding pixels in said black layer with said contone layer, since the corresponding pixel in said contone layer will be completely replaced by said contone object pixel.
7. A printer driver according to claim 2. where said bi-level layer data is transmitted to said printer in compressed form.
8. A printer driver according to claim 7, where Group 4 facsimile coding is used for said bi-level compression, with the modified Huffman coding of horizontal run lengths removed, tuned for higher resolutions, or used as normal.
9. A printer driver according to claim 7, where EDRL compression is used for said bi-level compression.
10. A printer driver according to claim 2, where said contone layer data is transmitted to said printer in compressed form.
11. A printer driver according to claim 10, where JPEG compression or wavelet compression is used for said contone compression.
12. In a printer driver for a printer; said printer driver managing a two layer buffer which represents a page to be printed; the first layer of said buffer containing background contone data: the second layer of said buffer containing foreground bi-level data: said printer driver transmitting data from said buffer to said printer; said printer compositing data from said layers of said buffer: a method comprising the following steps: operating said printer driver to determine whether contone data being composited with said contone layer obscures data in said bi-level layer; removing said obscured bi-level data from said bi-level layer; and either discarding said obscured bi-level data, or in the case where there is some interaction between the image represented by said obscuring contone data and the image represented by said obscured bi-level data, compositing said obscured bi-level data with said contone layer before compositing said obscuring contone data with said contone layer.
13. A method according to claim 12. where said contone layer has a lower resolution than said bi-level layer.
14. A method according to claim 13. where said two layer page buffer is augmented with a third layer of contone data: said third layer containing a contone version of the bi-level data of said second layer subsampled at the resolution of said first layer; said method comprising the following steps: operating said printer driver to determine whether contone data being composited with said first layer obscures data in said third layer; removing said obscured contone data from said third layer: either discarding said obscured contone data, or in the case where there is some interaction between the image represented by said obscuring contone data and the image represented by said obscured contone data then compositing said obscured contone data with said first layer before compositing said obscuring contone data with said first layer: and removing from said second layer bi-level data which corresponds to said obscured contone data in said third layer.
15. A method according to claim 12, where said interaction occurs between an image represented by said obscuring contone data and said obscured bi-level data where said contone data represents a non-opaque image object.
16. A method according to claim 12, where said contone layer data is color data, and said bi-level layer data is black data.
17. A method according to claim 16, where the following rules are implemented by said printer driver: when a black image object is composited with said page buffer, it is composited with said bi-level black layer; when a contone color image object is composited with said page buffer, it is composited with said contone color layer; wherever said contone image object obscures said black layer, even if not fully opaquely, obscured black layer pixels are composited with said contone layer, and removed from said black layer, before said contone object is composited with said contone layer; if a pixel of said contone object is fully opaque, then there is no need to composite corresponding pixels in said black layer with said contone layer, since the corresponding pixel in said contone layer will be completely replaced by said contone object pixel.
18. A modular printhead for a color printer, including a plurality of nozzles each of which has an ink supply port, an ink deposition port and a firing control port to receive signals to cause deposition of an ink dot from said deposition port during a firing cycle of said printhead; where, said nozzles of said printhead are arranged in pods, with said ink supply ports of the nozzles of each pod connected to a common ink supply line, the nozzles of each pod are arranged in a number of distinct rows, and pods of each different color are arranged together into operating groups in which selected mutually exclusive sub-groups of nozzles have their firing control ports gated to enable them to be fired simultaneously at predetermined phases of said firing cycle.
19. A modular printhead according to claim 18, where there are two rows of nozzles in each pod, and the nozzles of one row deposit the even dots along one line on the page, and the nozzles of the other row deposit the odd dots along a different line on the page.
20. A modular printhead according to claim 19. where the amount of offset between said rows of nozzles is designed to match the flow of paper under the nozzles.
21. A modular printhead according to claim 18, where the nozzles of each pod are fired in order, along a first row starting from a first side and ending at the other side, and then along subsequent rows in the same direction, starting from said first side and ending at said other side.
22. A modular printhead according to claim 18, where a single pod consists of ten nozzles sharing a common ink reservoir.
23. A modular printhead according to claim 18, where one pod of each different color are grouped together to form a chromapod in which the pods of different colors are arranged so that the dots printed by the nozzles of one color will be for different lines than those printed by the other colors at the same time, but that each pod of the chromapod will print the same group of dots in turn.
24. A modular printhead according to claim 23. where one or more chromapods are formed into a phasegroup in which groups of nozzles are fired simultaneously during a given firing phase.
25. A modular printhead according to claim 24, where one or more chromapods are organised into a single podgroup, one or more podgroups are organised into a single phasegroup, one or more phasegroups are organised into a single firegroup in which the same nozzles are fired simultaneously, one or more firegroups make up each segment, and a printhead has a number of segments side by side.
26. In a modular printhead for a color printer, including a plurality of nozzles each of which has an ink supply port, an ink deposition port and a firing control port to receive signals to cause deposition of an ink dot from the deposition port during a firing cycle of said printhead; where, the nozzles of the printhead are arranged in pods, with the ink supply ports of the nozzles of each pod connected to a common ink supply line, the nozzles of each pod are arranged in a number of distinct rows, and pods of each different color are arranged together into operating groups in which selected mutually exclusive sub-groups of nozzles have their firing control ports gated to enable them to be fired simultaneously at predetermined phases of a firing cycle, a method of firing comprising the steps of: firing one nozzle per color from a chromapod; and then firing a nozzle from the next chromapod within the podgroup.
27. A method according to claim 26, where a low-speed printing mode and a high-speed printing mode are defined.
28. A method according to claim 27. where there are at least two podgroups in each phasegroup. and during low-speed printing only one podgroup of each phasegroup fires nozzles at a time and the chromapods within both podgroups must all fire before the first chromapod fires again.
29. A method according to claim 27, where during high-speed printing, all podgroups fire nozzles simultaneously and the chromapods within a single podgroups must all fire before the first chromapod fires again.
30. A method according to claim 26. where the printhead produces at least one line of feedback to adjust the timing of the firing pulses.
31. In a modular printhead for a color printer, including a plurality of nozzles each of which has an ink supply port, an ink deposition port and a firing control port to receive signals to cause deposition of an ink dot from the deposition port during a firing cycle of the printhead; where, the nozzles of said printhead are arranged in pods, with the ink supply ports of the nozzles of each pod connected to a common ink supply line, the nozzles of each pod are arranged in a number of distinct rows, and pods of each different color are arranged together into operating groups in which selected mutually exclusive sub-groups of nozzles have their firing control ports gated to enable them to be fired simultaneously at predetermined phases of a firing cycle, and where the firing control port of each nozzle has an associated NozzleEnable bit that determines whether or not the nozzle will fire during a Print Cycle, a method of loading NozzleEnable bits . comprising the steps of: loading the NozzleEnable bits for the next print cycle into a set of shift registers: and once all said shift registers have been fully loaded, transferring all of the bits to the appropriate NozzleEnable bits.
32. A method according to claim 31, where there are N selected mutually exclusive sub-groups of nozzles each having n nozzles, the method comprising the further step of: loading, during a first clock pulse NozzleEnable bits into said shift registers for the following nozzles: 0. n. 2n. 3n. Nn: loading during the second clock pulse NozzleEnable bits into said shift registers for the following nozzles: 1, n+ 1, 2n+ l, 3n+ l,...Nn+l; and so on.
33. A method according to claim 32, where said shift registers are loaded with NozzleEnable bits in pod order.
34. A method according to claim 33, where said NozzleEnable bits for a given pod are loaded into said shift registers starting with the nozzle at the first side of the rows, and proceeding in zig-zag fashion between the rows so that the nozzles are loaded from the first side to the other side.
35. A method according to claim 33. where said NozzleEnable bits for a given pod are loaded into said shift registers in row order, and loaded in nozzle order within row.
36. A printhead capping mechanism for preventing evaporation of ink from a printhead, including a printhead cap and an actuating structure attached to said cap to selectively move said cap between an engaged position to press against the printhead and a disengaged position spaced away from the printhead. where the actuating structure includes a slip wheel to engage with a drive wheel in a printer in which the printhead is mounted, said engagement extending through at least part of a revolution of the drive wheel, such that rotation of said drive wheel in a first direction causes movement of said cap from said engaged position to said disengaged position, and that rotation of said drive wheel in a second direction causes movement of said cap from said disengaged position to said engaged position.
37. A printhead capping mechanism according to claim 36, where said cap includes a capping plate which holds an elastomeric seal and a sponge.
38. A printhead capping mechanism according to claim 36, where said elastomeric seal is shaped and sized to seal against said printhead when said cap is in said engaged position.
39. A printhead capping mechanism according to claim 36, where said sponge is sized and positioned to catch any drops of ink emerging from said printhead when said cap is in said engaged position.
40. A printhead capping mechanism according to claim 36. where when said printhead is in use, said actuating structure is operated to move said cap to said disengaged position where it is held out of the paper path of the printer.
41. A printhead capping mechanism according to claim 36, where said actuating structure operates by pivoting said cap between said engaged and disengaged positions.
42. A printhead capping mechanism according to claim 41, where said cap is connected along the length of a rotatable rod. but spaced laterally away from said rod so that rotation of said rod about its axis causes movement of said cap between said engaged and disengaged positions.
43. A printhead capping mechanism according to claim 42, where said slip wheel is positioned at an end of said rod.
44. A printhead capping mechanism according to claim 43, where said drive wheel is coupled to the paper transport motor of the printer such that when printing is occurring said rod is driven to cause said cap to move to said disengaged position.
45. A printhead capping mechanism according to claim 44, where said drive wheel is coupled to the paper transport motor of the printer such that when printing stops said rod is driven to cause said cap to move to said engaged position.
46. A printhead capping mechanism according to claim 44, where a resilient member is used to assist in holding said cap in said engaged position.
47. A printhead capping mechanism according to claim 46, where said resilience is included in said connection between the cap and the rod.
48. A printhead capping mechanism according to claim 47, where said connection is a series of flexible arms.
49. A printhead assembly including a printhead, and said printhead capping mechanism according to claim 36.
50. A printer including said printhead capping mechanism according to claim 36, where a drive wheel of the paper transport system of the printer operates the actuating structure of the mechanism.
51. A halftoner/compositor unit for halftoning a contone color layer to bi-level, and compositing a black layer over the halftoned contone layer, comprising: an input port to receive a contone color layer in the form of a series of contone color pixel values, and a black layer in the form of a series of black dot values: a dither unit to dither each contone color pixel value received at said input port and determine the value of a bi-level output dot for each color component; a composite unit to receive the values of the bi-level output dots from said dither unit and the black dot values from said input port, and to composite the black layer over the halftoned layer; a clock enable generator to generate enable signals for clocking the contone color pixel input, the black dot input, and the dot output: and an output port to deliver a set of bi-level image lines in the form of a series of bi-level dots.
52. A halftoner/compositor unit according to claim 51, where in the output the color planes are separated.
53. A halftoner/compositor unit according to claim 51, where the color contone layer is a CMYK contone layer.
54. A halftoner/compositor unit according to claim 53, where the output stage of the unit uses 8 parallel pixel FIFOs, one each for even cyan, odd cyan, even magenta, odd magenta, even yellow, odd yellow, even black, and odd black.
55. A halftoner/compositor unit according to claim 54. where the clock enable generator generates an even signal which is used to select the even or odd set of output dot FIFOs.
56. A halftoner/compositor unit according to claim 51, where the unit generates a page of dots of a specified width and length and a number of registers are employed, as follows:
Figure imgf000152_0001
57. A halftoner/compositor unit according to claim 51, where in said dither unit each dot column of the dither volume is implemented as a fixed set of thresholds.
58. A halftoner/compositor unit according to claim 57, where the dither unit uses a triple-threshold 64x64x 3x8-bit (12KB) dither volume, and the three thresholds form a 24-bit value which is to be retrieved from a dither unit ROM in one cycle.
59. A halftoner/compositor unit according to claim 58, where if dither unit registration is desired between color planes, then the same triple- threshold value can be retrieved once and used to dither each color component.
60. A halftoner/compositor unit according to claim 58, where if dither unit registration is not desired, then the dither unit can be split into four subcells and stored in four separately addressable ROMs from which four different triple-threshold values can be retrieved in parallel in one cycle.
61. A halftoner/compositor unit according to claim 58, where four color planes share the same dither unit at vertical and/or horizontal offsets of 32 dots from each other.
62. A halftoner/compositor unit according to claim 58, where a multi- threshold dither unit is used.
63. A halftoner/compositor unit according to claim 62. where a triple- threshold dither unit converts a triple-threshold value Tα, T2 and T3 and an intensity value V into an interval and thence a one or zero bit as shown in the following Table:
Figure imgf000153_0001
64. A halftoner/compositor unit according to claim 51, where given a 4-bit halftoned color CCMCYCKC and a 1-bit black layer opacity Kb, the composite logic is as defined in the following Table:
Figure imgf000154_0001
65. A halftoner/compositor unit according to claim 51. where the clock enable generator uses a set of counters, and the internal logic of the counters is defined in the following Table:
Figure imgf000155_0001
66. A halftoner/compositor unit according to claim 51. where the logic of the clock enable signals is defined in the following Table:
Figure imgf000156_0001
67. In a halftoner/compositor unit for digitally halftoning a contone color layer to bi-level, and compositing a black layer over the halftoned contone layer, comprising: an input port to receive an expanded color contone layer in the form of a series of contone color pixel values, and an expanded black layer in the form of a series of black dot values: an output port to deliver a set of bi-level image lines in the form of a series of bi-level dots, a method of simultaneously halftoning and compositing, comprising the steps of: using a dither unit to dither each contone color pixel value received at the input port and determine the value of a bi-level output dot for each color component; using a composite unit to receive the values of the bi-level output dots from the dither unit and the black dot values from the input port, and to composite the black dots over the halftoned color dots: and using a clock enable generator to generate enable signals for clocking the contone color pixel input, the black dot input, and the dot output.
68. A method according to claim 67, comprising the further step of using a triple-threshold 64x 64x 3 x8-bit (12KB) dither volume, where the three thresholds form a 24-bit value which is to be retrieved from the dither unit ROM in one cycle.
69. A method according to claim 68. comprising, if dither registration is desired between color planes, the further step of using the same triple- threshold value which is retrieved once to dither each color component.
70. A method according to claim 68, comprising, if dither cell registration is not desired, the further step of splitting the dither cell into four subcells and storing it in four separately addressable ROMs from which four different triple- threshold values can be retrieved in parallel in one cycle.
71. A method according to claim 67, comprising the further step of using a multi-threshold dither.
72. A method according to claim 68. comprising the further step of converting a triple-threshold value T1; T2 and T3 and an intensity value V into an interval and thence a one or zero bi as shown in the following Table:
Figure imgf000157_0001
73. A method according to claim 67, where given a 4-bit halftoned color CCMCYCKC and a 1-bit black layer opacity Kb, the composite logic is as defined in the following Table:
Figure imgf000158_0001
74. A method according to claim 67, where the clock enable generator uses a set of counters, and the internal logic of the counters is defined in the following Table:
Figure imgf000159_0001
75. A method according to claim 67. where the logic of the clock enable signals is defined in the following Table:
Figure imgf000160_0001
76. A dither unit for digitally halftoning a contone color image, in the form of an array of contone color pixel values, to bi-level dots; said dither unit comprising a dither volume; said dither volume comprising, for each dither cell location, a fixed set of n thresholds defining n + 1 intensity intervals within which said dither cell location is defined to be alternately not set and set.
77. A dither unit according to claim 76. further comprising, for each color component of the image, a multi-threshold unit: all of said multi- threshold units operatively coupled to said dither volume: where each said multi-threshold unit determines the value of an output dot corresponding to a contone color pixel component value by determining whether the dither cell location corresponding to the location of said output dot is defined to be set within the intensity interval which said contone value uniquely selects.
78. A dither unit according to claim 77, where three thresholds are used.
79. A dither unit according to claim 78. where three 8-bit thresholds are used.
80. A dither unit according to claim 77. where if dither cell registration is desired between color planes, then a multi-threshold value is retrieved once from the dither volume and used to dither each color component.
81. A dither unit according to claim 79. where if dither cell registration is not desired between color planes, then the dither cell is split into subcells and stored in separately addressable memories from which different multi-threshold values are retrieved in parallel.
82. A dither unit according to claim 81, capable of dithering a four- component contone color image; said dither unit comprising four separate triple-threshold units: each said triple-threshold unit receiving a series of contone color pixel component values for respective color components: said dither unit also comprising a dither cell address generator: said address generator operating in conjunction with four four- way multiplexors, for respective triple-threshold units, to control the retrieval of four different triple-threshold values from subcells of the dither volume.
83. A dither unit according to claim 82. where the triple-threshold units convert triple-threshold values T1; T2 and T3 and an intensity value V into an interval and thence a one or zero bit according to the rules shown in the following Table:
Figure imgf000161_0001
84. In a dither unit for digitally halftoning a contone color image, in the form of an array of contone color pixel values, to bi-level dots, and said dither unit comprising a dither volume, a halftoning method comprising the following steps: representing each dither cell location of said dither volume by a fixed set of n thresholds which define n + 1 intensity intervals within which said dither cell location is defined to be alternately not set and set; and using the value of the contone pixel component being dithered to uniquely select one of said n + 1 intensity intervals, to determine the value of the output dot corresponding to said contone pixel component value.
85. A method according to claim 84, where the dither unit further comprises, for each color component of the image, a multi-threshold unit: all of said multi-threshold units being operatively coupled to said dither volume; and the method further comprising the following step: determining in each said multi-threshold unit the value of an output dot corresponding to a contone color pixel component value by determining whether the dither cell location corresponding to the location of said output dot is defined to be set within the intensity interval which said contone value uniquely selects.
86. A method according to claim 85, where three thresholds are used.
87. A method according to claim 86. where three 8-bit thresholds are used.
88. A method according to claim 85, comprising the further step, where dither cell registration is desired between color planes, of retrieving a multi-threshold value once and using it to dither each color component.
89. A method according to claim 85. comprising the further step. where if dither cell registration is not desired between color planes, of splitting the dither cell into subcells. storing them in separately addressable memories, and retrieving different multi-threshold values from each memory in parallel.
90. A method according to claim 89. capable of dithering a four- component contone color image: said method utilizing four separate triple- threshold units: each said triple-threshold unit receiving a series of contone color pixel component values for respective color components: said method also utilizing a dither cell address generator: said address generator operating in conjunction with four four- way multiplexors, for respective triple- threshold units, to control the retrieval of four different triple-threshold values from subcells of the dither volume.
91. A method according to claim 90, where said triple-threshold units convert triple-threshold values Tl5 T2 and T3 and an intensity value V into an interval and thence a one or zero bit according to the rules shown in the following Table:
92. A printer equipped with a printhead controller for a printhead of the type including a plurality of nozzles each of which has an ink supply port to receive ink from a reservoir, an ink deposition port to eject ink dots, and a firing control port to receive signals to cause deposition of an ink dot from said deposition port during a firing cycle of the printhead: where said printhead controller includes means to supply a firing signal to said firing control ports of said nozzles, and is operable, before each print job. to set all the nozzles to fire, and to execute a series of modified firing cycles to provide a series of short firing pulses to each nozzle, the duration of the pulse being insufficient to fire the drops, but enough to heat up the ink.
93. A printer according to claim 92. where said printhead further includes a temperature sensor to produce a signal indicative of the temperature of the printhead, and said printhead controller further includes means to receive the signal indicative of the temperature of the printhead from the temperature sensor, and said series of short firing pulses continues until said signal indicative of the temperature of the printhead indicates that it has reached its operating equilibrium temperature.
94. A printer according to claim 92. where said short firing pulses each contain about half the energy of a firing pulse that is sufficient to fire a drop of ink.
95. A printer according to claim 92. where the printhead controller executes the series of modified firing cycles until a temperature between 10 and 50° C above ambient is reached.
96. A printer according to claim 95. where the printhead controller executes the series of modified firing cycles until a temperature between 20 and 40° C above ambient is reached.
97. A printer according to claim 96. where the printhead controller executes the series of modified firing cycles until a temperature about 30° C above ambient is reached.
98. A printer according to claim 92, where the printhead controller executes about 200 modified firing cycles for each nozzle.
99. A printer according to claim 92. where the printhead controller executes the modified firing cycles for around 50 milliseconds.
100. A printer according to claim 92. where the printhead controller executes the modified firing cycles while the data is being transferred to the printer.
101. In a printer equipped with a printhead controller for a printhead of the type including a plurality of nozzles each of which has an ink supply port to receive ink from a reservoir, an ink deposition port to eject ink dots. and a firing control port to receive signals to cause deposition of an ink dot from the deposition port during a firing cycle of the printhead: where, the printhead controller includes means to supply a firing signal to the firing control ports of the nozzles, a pre-heat method of operating the printhead controller, comprising the steps of: setting, before each print job, all the nozzles to fire; and executing a series of modified firing cycles to provide a series of short firing pulses to each nozzle, the duration of each pulse being insufficient to fire the drops, but enough to heat up the ink.
102. The method of claim 101, where the printhead includes a temperature sensor to produce a signal indicative of the temperature of the printhead. and the printhead controller includes means to receive the signal indicative of the temperature of the printhead from the temperature sensor, and the method includes the further steps of: monitoring the signal indicative of the temperature of the printhead; and terminating the series of modified firing cycles when the printhead reaches its operating equilibrium temperature.
103. The method of claim 101, where said short firing pulses each contain about half the energy of a firing pulse that is sufficient to fire a drop of ink.
104. A method according to claim 101. where the printhead controller executes the series of modified firing cycles until a temperature between 10 and 50° C above ambient is reached.
105. A method according to claim 104. where the printhead controller executes the series of modified firing cycles until a temperature between 20 and 40° C above ambient is reached.
106. A method according to claim 105. where the printhead controller executes the series of modified firing cycles until a temperature about 30° C above ambient is reached.
107. A method according to claim 101. where the printhead controller executes about 200 modified firing cycles for each nozzle.
108. A method according to claim 101, where the printhead controller executes the modified firing cycles for around 50 milliseconds.
109. A method according to claim 101, where the printhead controller executes the modified firing cycles while the data is being transferred to the printer.
110. A resource held in computer memory, multiple parallel processors which require simultaneous access to the resource and a resource address generator to generate coordinates within the resource, where the resource is divided into different parts with each part being stored in different memory banks, and the resource address generator generates coordinates which are used to select the parts of the resource that are used by each processor, the selection being arranged to ensure that each part is only used by one processor at a time.
111. A resource according to claim 110. where the selection also ensures that each processor uses the parts in the order in which they appear in the resource.
112. A resource according to claim 110, where the resource is a multi- threshold dither matrix used for digitally halftoning a contone color image, in the form of an array of contone color pixel values, to bi-level dots; said multi- threshold dither matrix comprising, for each dither cell location, a fixed set of n thresholds defining n + 1 intensity intervals within which said dither cell location is defined to be alternately not set and set.
113. A resource according to claim 112, where the multiple parallel processors which require simultaneous access to the resource are multi- threshold units provided for each color component of the image, all of said multi-threshold units being operatively coupled to the multi-threshold dither matrix, and each said multi-threshold unit determining the value of an output dot corresponding to a contone color pixel component value by determining whether the dither cell location corresponding to the location of said output dot is defined to be set within the intensity interval which said contone value uniquely selects.
114. A resource according to claim 113. where the dither cell is split into subcells and stored in separately addressable memories from which different multi-threshold values are retrieved in parallel.
115. A resource according to claim 114, where a four color component contone image is to be halftoned, four separate triple-threshold units may each receive a series of contone color pixel values for respective color components, and a dither cell address generator operates in conjunction with four four-way multiplexors, for respective threshold units, to control the retrieval of four different triple-threshold values from four different subcells of the dither matrix.
116. A method of accessing resources held in computer memory, where multiple parallel processors require simultaneous access to the resource and there is a resource address generator to generate coordinates within the resource, the method comprising the steps of: dividing the resource into different parts; storing each part in a different memory bank; and operating the resource address generator to generates coordinates which are used to select the parts of the resource that are used by each processor, the selection being arranged to ensure that each part is only used by one processor at a time.
117. The method of claim 116, comprising the further step of: the selection also ensuring that each processor uses the parts in the order in which they appear in the resource.
118. The method of claim 117. where the resource is a multi-threshold dither matrix for digital halftoning a contone color image, in the form of an array of contone color pixel values, to bi-level dots, said dither matrix comprising, for each dithe rcell location, a fixed set of n thresholds defining n + 1 intensity intervals within which said dither cell location is defined to be alternately not set and set: the multiple parallel processors which require simultaneous access to the resource are multi-threshold units provided for each color component of the image: all the multi-threshold units are operatively coupled to the dither matrix; and the method includes the further step of: determining, for each multi-threshold unit, the value of an output dot corresponding to a contone color pixel component value by determining whether the dither cell location corresponding to the location of said output dot is defined to be set within the intensity interval which said contone value uniquely selects.
119. The method of claim 118, comprising the step of: splitting the dither cell into subcells and storing each subcell in a separately addressable memory from which different multi-threshold values are retrieved in parallel.
120. The method of claim 118, where a four color component contone layer is to be halftoned. four separate triple threshold units each receive a series of contone color pixel values for respective color components, and the method comprises the step of: operating the dither cell address generator in conjunction with four four- way multiplexors, for respective threshold units, to control the retrieval of four different triple threshold values from four different subcells of the dither matrix.
121. A printer system for use in a printer having a printhead of the type including a plurality of nozzles each of which has an ink supply port, and ink deposition port and a firing control port to receive signals to cause deposition of an ink dot from the deposition port during a firing cycle of the printhead. the printer also including an ink reservoir to supply ink to the ink supply ports of said nozzles, and said printer system operates to predict when said ink reservoir will run out of ink, said printer system comprising, an input port to receive a signal indicative of the number of dots of ink printed by or to be printed by said printer, a memory in which is stored data representing the number of dots of ink remaining in said reservoir, and a processor to receive signals from said input port and to update said memory as printing takes place, where said signal indicative of the number of dots of ink printed by the printer is related to the signals received at the firing control ports of said nozzles.
122. The printer system of claim 121. where, at the end of a predetermined number of pages, an indication whether there is enough ink remaining in the reservoir to print another page is generated.
123. The printer system of claim 122, where a new page will not be printed unless there is enough ink left.
124. The printer system of claim 121, where the signal indicative of the number of dots printed or to be printed is derived from a controller for the printhead, the printhead itself, or the ink reservoir.
125. The printer system of claim 121. where a dot counter maintains a count of the number of dots of ink fired or to be fired from the printhead.
126. The printer system of claim 125. where the dot count is periodically cleared.
127. The printer system of claim 125. where the dot counter has an input port to receive a signal whenever a dot is printed, a bit counter with clock and clear input terminals, a positive feedback connection around the counter, and an output from the counter indicating the current count.
128. The printer system of claim 127. where an encoder is placed in the input line to the dot counter to convert the signal received.
129. The printer system of claim 121. for use in a printer which includes more than one ink reservoir, where the printer system includes an input port respective to each ink reservoir, to receive a signal indicative of the number of dots of ink from that reservoir printed by or to be printed by the printer, and the memory stores data representing the number of dots of ink remaining in each reservoir.
130. In a printer system for use in a printer having a printhead of the type including a plurality of nozzles each of which has an ink supply port, and ink deposition port and a firing control port to receive signals to cause deposition of an ink dot from the deposition port during a firing cycle of the printhead. where the printer also including an ink reservoir to supply ink to the ink supply ports of said nozzles, a method of operating said printer system to predict when said ink reservoir will run out of ink, comprising the following steps: receiving a signal indicative of the number of dots of ink printed by or to be printed by said printer; storing data representing the number of dots of ink remaining in said reservoir: and updating said memory as printing takes place: where. said signal indicative of the number of dots of ink printed by or to be printed by the printer is related to the signals received at the firing control ports of said nozzles.
131. The method of claim 130. comprising the further step of: generating an indication whether there is enough ink remaining in the reservoir to print another page, at the end of a predetermined number of pages.
132. The method of claim 131, where a new page will not be printed unless there is enough ink left.
133. The method of claim 130, where the signal indicative of the number of dots printed or to be printed is derived from a controller for the printhead. the printhead itself, or the ink reservoir.
134. The method of claim 130, comprising the further step of maintaining a count of the number of dots of ink fired or to be fired from the printhead.
135. The method of claim 134, comprising the further step of periodically clearing the dot count.
136. The method of claim 130. where the printer includes more than one ink reservoir, comprising the further step: receiving a signal indicative of the number of dots of ink from each reservoir printed or to be printed: and storing data representing the number of dots of ink remaining in each reservoir.
137. A firing pulse duration control system for a printer, comprising: a first input port to receive a signal indicative of the voltage available; a programmable pulse duration table, indexed by signals received at the first input port, to generate control signals that represent predetermined durations for a firing pulse: and an output port to transmit the control signals.
138. A control system according to claim 137, further comprising a second input port to receive a signal indicative of the temperature of the printhead in the printer wherein the programmable pulse duration table is indexed by signals received at both the first and second input ports.
139. A control system according to claim 137, where the entries in the table represent values in the range of 0-4ms and a control output is generated according to the entry indexed.
140. A control system according to claim 137. where a pulse width generator is placed downstream of the control system to receive its control output and generate the firing pulses for the printhead.
141. A control system according to claim 137. where the table is written before printing the first page of a print run.
142. A control system according to claim 137, where the table is updated in between pages of a' print run.
143. A control system according to claim 137, where each entry in the table includes a weighting from one or more of the following features: user brightness settings; viscosity curve of ink;
Tsense which informs the controller how hot the printhead is: Vsense which informs the controller how much voltage is available to the actuator:
Rsense which informs the controller of the resistivity (Ohms per square) of the actuator heater: and
Wsense which informs the controller of the width of the critical part of the heater.
144. A control system according to claim 137. where the Pulse
Duration table has 256 entries, and each entry is 8-bits.
145. A control system according to claim 138, where the signal indicative of voltage comes from Vsense, and the signal indicative of temperature comes from Tsense.
146. A control system according to claim 145, where the signals received at the input ports are converted for use to index the table.
147. A control system according to claim 146, where an 8-bit entry to the table is indexed by two 4-bit numbers, with the upper 4-bits from Vsense. and the lower 4-bits from Tsense.
148. In a firing pulse duration control system for a printer, comprising: a first input port: a programmable pulse duration table: and an output port: a method of generating a firing pulse duration control signal, comprising the steps of: receiving a first signal indicative of the voltage available; indexing the programmable pulse duration table by the first signal to generate control signals that represent predetermined durations for a firing pulse: and transmitting the control signals.
149. A method according to claim 148, where a second input in provided, and the method includes the additional steps of: receiving a second signal indicative of the temperature of the printhead in the printer; and indexing the programmable pulse duration table by the first and second signals.
150. A method according to claim 148, preceded by the step of writing the table before printing the first page of a print run.
151. A method according to claim 150. comprising the additional step of updating the table in between pages of a print run.
152. A method according to claim 148, comprising the additional step of weighting each entry in the table with one or more of the following features: user brightness settings; viscosity curve of ink;
Tsense which informs the controller how hot the printhead is;
Vsense which informs the controller how much voltage is available to the actuator:
Rsense which informs the controller of the resistivity (Ohms per square) of the actuator heater: and
Wsense which informs the controller of the width of the critical part of the heater.
153. A method according to claim 149, comprising the additional step of using Vsense for the signal indicative of voltage, and using Tsense for the signal indicative of temperature.
154. A method according to claim 153, comprising the additional step of converting the signals received at the input ports for use to index the table.
155. A method according to claim 154, comprising the additional step of indexing an 8-bit entry to the table by two 4-bit numbers, with the upper 4-bits from Vsense, and the lower 4-bits from Tsense.
PCT/AU1999/000984 1998-11-09 1999-11-09 Printer and methods of operation WO2000027640A1 (en)

Priority Applications (13)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
KR1020047017985A KR100622619B1 (en) 1998-11-09 1999-11-09 Printer system having ink reservoir monitor
KR1020047017987A KR100577357B1 (en) 1998-11-09 1999-11-09 Firing pulse duration control system for a printer
KR1020047017978A KR100576744B1 (en) 1998-11-09 1999-11-09 Printhead capping mechanism
DE69940824T DE69940824D1 (en) 1998-11-09 1999-11-09 PRINTER DRIVER AND OPERATING PROCEDURES
KR1020047017984A KR100577056B1 (en) 1998-11-09 1999-11-09 Multiple simultaneous access
KR1020047017980A KR100576605B1 (en) 1998-11-09 1999-11-09 Dither unit
JP2000580843A JP2003508827A (en) 1998-11-09 1999-11-09 Printer and operating method thereof
KR1020047017977A KR100576642B1 (en) 1998-11-09 1999-11-09 Modular printhead for a color printer
AU15336/00A AU1533600A (en) 1998-11-09 1999-11-09 Printer and methods of operation
KR1020047017982A KR100577088B1 (en) 1998-11-09 1999-11-09 Printer with printhead firing controller
KR1020047017979A KR100577025B1 (en) 1998-11-09 1999-11-09 Halftoner/compositor unit
AT99957714T ATE430443T1 (en) 1998-11-09 1999-11-09 PRINTER DRIVERS AND OPERATING PROCEDURES
EP99957714A EP1128961B1 (en) 1998-11-09 1999-11-09 Printer driver and methods of operation

Applications Claiming Priority (4)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
AUPP7024A AUPP702498A0 (en) 1998-11-09 1998-11-09 Image creation method and apparatus (ART77)
AUPP7025 1998-11-09
AUPP7024 1998-11-09
AUPP7025A AUPP702598A0 (en) 1998-11-09 1998-11-09 Image creation method and apparatus (ART71)

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2000027640A1 true WO2000027640A1 (en) 2000-05-18

Family

ID=25645923

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/AU1999/000984 WO2000027640A1 (en) 1998-11-09 1999-11-09 Printer and methods of operation

Country Status (8)

Country Link
EP (1) EP1128961B1 (en)
JP (5) JP2003508827A (en)
KR (9) KR100577056B1 (en)
CN (3) CN1138636C (en)
AT (1) ATE430443T1 (en)
AU (1) AU1533600A (en)
DE (1) DE69940824D1 (en)
WO (1) WO2000027640A1 (en)

Cited By (27)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2003018316A1 (en) * 2001-08-31 2003-03-06 Silverbrook Research Pty. Ltd. Printer including printhead capping mechanism
EP1289766A1 (en) * 2000-05-24 2003-03-12 Silverbrook Research Pty. Limited Print engine/controller and printhead interface chip incorporating the engine/controller
EP1296834A1 (en) * 2000-05-23 2003-04-02 Silverbrook Research Pty. Limited Print engine/controller with color mask
EP1301351A1 (en) * 2000-06-30 2003-04-16 Silverbrook Research Pty. Limited Controlling the timing of printhead nozzle firing
EP1301350A1 (en) * 2000-06-30 2003-04-16 Silverbrook Research Pty. Limited Print engine/controller to work in multiples and a printhead driven by multiple print engine/controllers
WO2003068513A1 (en) * 2002-02-13 2003-08-21 Silverbrook Research Pty. Ltd. Printer with capping device
GB2387817A (en) * 2002-04-27 2003-10-29 Hewlett Packard Co Page wide array inkjet printer having halftone controller and multiple printheads, each printing different image strips.
US6977751B1 (en) 2000-06-30 2005-12-20 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd Print engine/controller to work in multiples and a printhead driven by multiple print engine/controllers
AU2005200474B2 (en) * 2000-06-30 2006-04-06 Memjet Technology Limited Print engine/controller configured to synchronize output from half-toner/compositor to printhead
US7059704B2 (en) 1998-11-09 2006-06-13 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd Printhead capper frictionally engaged to drive
US7145696B2 (en) 1998-11-09 2006-12-05 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd Print data compression method and printer driver
US7150510B2 (en) 2000-05-24 2006-12-19 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd Print engine controller for an inkjet printhead assembly having infrared tag control
US7173739B2 (en) 2000-05-23 2007-02-06 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd Pagewidth inkjet printer having composite image printing control
AU2003202630B2 (en) * 2002-02-13 2007-03-29 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd Printer with capping device
US7457001B2 (en) 2000-05-23 2008-11-25 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd Half-toner compositor for use in a print engine/controller
US7525677B2 (en) 2000-05-23 2009-04-28 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd Inkjet printer having image decoding controller
SG152036A1 (en) * 2000-06-30 2009-05-29 Silverbrook Res Pty Ltd A pagewidth printhead defining an array of nozzles with predetermined groupings
CN1812474B (en) * 2000-05-24 2010-05-12 西尔弗布鲁克研究有限公司 Printing controller with label coder
US7959066B2 (en) 2000-05-24 2011-06-14 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd Controller having tag encoder for printhead
US8020966B2 (en) 2001-03-27 2011-09-20 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd Ink channel extrusion module for pagewidth printhead
US8270023B2 (en) 2000-05-23 2012-09-18 Zamtec Limited Print engine controller for double-buffered processing
CN103862879A (en) * 2014-01-15 2014-06-18 珠海艾派克微电子有限公司 Ink box chip and ink box employing same
US8860971B2 (en) 2011-11-22 2014-10-14 Seiko Epson Corporation Printing device and printing method of printing device
CN109034142A (en) * 2018-09-29 2018-12-18 广州微印信息科技有限公司 A kind of photo processing method based on image recognition
CN110406265A (en) * 2019-05-06 2019-11-05 珠海艾派克微电子有限公司 Nozzle print cartridge and circuit substrate
CN112181870A (en) * 2020-09-17 2021-01-05 重庆大学 Memory page management method, device and equipment and readable storage medium
CN115593098A (en) * 2021-06-28 2023-01-13 细美事有限公司(Kr) Preheating method of substrate processing apparatus and computer program for the same

Families Citing this family (34)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US7268910B2 (en) * 2001-05-16 2007-09-11 Agfa Corporation Just-in-time raster image assembly
JP4125145B2 (en) * 2002-02-13 2008-07-30 キヤノン株式会社 Data processing method, program, and data processing system
KR100636202B1 (en) 2004-12-03 2006-10-19 삼성전자주식회사 Print apparatus and print method
JP5430364B2 (en) * 2009-11-17 2014-02-26 キヤノン株式会社 Image forming apparatus
KR101685150B1 (en) * 2011-01-14 2016-12-09 주식회사 원익아이피에스 Thin film deposition apparatus and substrate processing system comprising the same
US8553286B2 (en) * 2011-06-08 2013-10-08 Electronics For Imaging, Inc. Halftoning method and apparatus using templates indexed by code
JP2013092814A (en) 2011-10-24 2013-05-16 Seiko Epson Corp Printing system, data transfer method
CN103182864B (en) * 2011-12-31 2015-05-20 北大方正集团有限公司 Digital printing synchronous control device and control method
US9162450B2 (en) * 2012-03-22 2015-10-20 Canon Kabushiki Kaisha Image processing apparatus and image processing method
WO2013150915A1 (en) 2012-04-04 2013-10-10 キヤノン株式会社 Image processing device, image processing method, and program
JP6027427B2 (en) * 2012-12-19 2016-11-16 理想科学工業株式会社 Inkjet recording device
JP6184115B2 (en) 2013-02-01 2017-08-23 キヤノン株式会社 Image processing method and image processing apparatus
JP6184196B2 (en) 2013-06-26 2017-08-23 キヤノン株式会社 Image processing method and image processing apparatus
US9669627B2 (en) * 2014-01-10 2017-06-06 Fujifilm Dimatix, Inc. Methods, systems, and apparatuses for improving drop velocity uniformity, drop mass uniformity, and drop formation
WO2015116117A1 (en) * 2014-01-30 2015-08-06 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Embedding data in halftone images
JP6728578B2 (en) * 2014-08-22 2020-07-22 セイコーエプソン株式会社 Printing device, printing device control method, and program
JP2016055595A (en) * 2014-09-12 2016-04-21 セイコーエプソン株式会社 Printer and control method of the same
US9531920B2 (en) * 2015-01-30 2016-12-27 Kyocera Document Solutions Inc. Digital image color plane compression
US9363422B1 (en) * 2015-01-30 2016-06-07 Kyocera Document Solutions Inc. Cell-based compression with edge detection and interleaved encoding
US9363416B1 (en) * 2015-01-30 2016-06-07 Kyocera Document Solutions Inc. Digital image attribute plane compression
CA2975825C (en) * 2015-02-13 2020-08-25 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Printhead employing data packets including address data
CN106681673B (en) * 2016-12-21 2019-08-30 福建升腾资讯有限公司 A kind of thermal printer gray level printing method
TWI681310B (en) * 2017-01-05 2020-01-01 三緯國際立體列印科技股份有限公司 Image file transform method and three-dimensional printing system
BR112019015681B1 (en) 2017-01-31 2023-10-31 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P MEMORY ARRANGEMENT FOR A FLUID EJECTION MATRIX, FLUID EJECTION MATRIX AND FLUID CARTRIDGE
US10857808B2 (en) 2017-02-07 2020-12-08 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Calibrating printing pens of print head assemblies
WO2018186853A1 (en) * 2017-04-05 2018-10-11 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. On-die actuator evaluation with pre-charged thresholds
JP6985810B2 (en) * 2017-04-27 2021-12-22 キヤノン株式会社 Transfer device, transfer method and multifunction device
US10796209B2 (en) * 2018-06-26 2020-10-06 Xerox Corporation Ink jet print head with standard computer interface
CN112912232B (en) * 2018-10-29 2023-03-10 惠普发展公司,有限责任合伙企业 Heat mapping
CN110816100B (en) * 2019-11-13 2021-04-23 深圳诚拓数码设备有限公司 Printing method, printing apparatus and printed product
US10855881B1 (en) * 2019-12-18 2020-12-01 Ricoh Company, Ltd. Vectorized multi-level halftoning using ternary logic
CN111737307B (en) * 2020-04-10 2024-04-09 中国电力工程顾问集团中南电力设计院有限公司 Automatic checking method based on full elements of typical boundary conditions of power distribution network
CN112918116B (en) * 2021-01-27 2022-07-22 北京印刷学院 Method for improving printing precision of color printing system
CN113945544B (en) * 2021-10-13 2023-10-17 天津大学 Dynamic single-pixel imaging and degraded image restoration method for space-frequency domain measurement

Family Cites Families (21)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
FR2716593B1 (en) * 1983-03-17 1997-03-28 Canon Kk Image processing apparatus and method and data processing system.
DE3752300T2 (en) * 1986-08-29 2000-04-13 Canon Kk Input / output device and method for processing image data
JPS63184886A (en) * 1987-01-27 1988-07-30 Fujitsu Ltd Binarizing system for picture processing
JPH0385870A (en) * 1989-08-29 1991-04-11 Mutoh Ind Ltd Binarizing circuit for scanner read picture data
NL8902726A (en) * 1989-11-06 1991-06-03 Oce Nederland Bv METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR EDITING DATA FROM IMAGES
DE69131369T2 (en) * 1990-07-31 1999-12-16 Canon Kk Image processing apparatus and method
JPH04199975A (en) * 1990-11-29 1992-07-21 Canon Inc Image forming device
JPH05328075A (en) * 1992-05-22 1993-12-10 Canon Inc Image forming device
JPH06305146A (en) * 1993-04-28 1994-11-01 Canon Inc Recording apparatus
JP3311097B2 (en) * 1993-08-20 2002-08-05 キヤノン株式会社 Ink jet recording device
JP3207652B2 (en) * 1993-12-28 2001-09-10 キヤノン株式会社 Print element information detecting device, print head driving device, and printing device including the device
JP2905106B2 (en) * 1994-12-02 1999-06-14 大日本スクリーン製造株式会社 Method of creating threshold matrix and method of binarizing color image
US5745657A (en) * 1994-06-22 1998-04-28 T/R Systems Method and apparatus for multi-modal printing with electrophotographic print engine
JPH08256255A (en) * 1995-03-16 1996-10-01 Konica Corp Image forming device
JP3749282B2 (en) * 1995-05-16 2006-02-22 株式会社東芝 Image processing device
JPH09116751A (en) * 1995-10-20 1997-05-02 Hitachi Ltd Picture processor and printer device
JPH09138847A (en) * 1995-11-14 1997-05-27 Canon Inc Picture processing method/device
JPH09191402A (en) * 1996-01-09 1997-07-22 Canon Inc Picture processor
JPH09277607A (en) * 1996-04-10 1997-10-28 Konica Corp Color image forming device
JPH10258504A (en) * 1997-03-19 1998-09-29 Sharp Corp Printer for txtile printing
JP3372821B2 (en) * 1997-04-15 2003-02-04 キヤノン株式会社 Ink jet device, temperature estimation method and control method for ink jet head for the device

Non-Patent Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
"None" *

Cited By (60)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US7540602B2 (en) 1998-11-09 2009-06-02 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd Inkjet printer with a protective print media input tray
US7806500B2 (en) 1998-11-09 2010-10-05 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd Printer with processor having bused decoding and expansion units
US7145696B2 (en) 1998-11-09 2006-12-05 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd Print data compression method and printer driver
US6547368B2 (en) 1998-11-09 2003-04-15 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd Printer including printhead capping mechanism
US7059704B2 (en) 1998-11-09 2006-06-13 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd Printhead capper frictionally engaged to drive
US7201466B2 (en) 1998-11-09 2007-04-10 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd Capping mechanism driven by paper transport
US8113647B2 (en) 1998-11-09 2012-02-14 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd Inkjet printer with a protective print media input tray
US7571972B2 (en) 1998-11-09 2009-08-11 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd Printer with a processor having bused decoding and expansion units
US8270023B2 (en) 2000-05-23 2012-09-18 Zamtec Limited Print engine controller for double-buffered processing
US7525677B2 (en) 2000-05-23 2009-04-28 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd Inkjet printer having image decoding controller
US7457001B2 (en) 2000-05-23 2008-11-25 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd Half-toner compositor for use in a print engine/controller
US7270391B2 (en) 2000-05-23 2007-09-18 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd Method for processing an image
US7957011B2 (en) 2000-05-23 2011-06-07 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd Printer printing composited print image planes
US7173739B2 (en) 2000-05-23 2007-02-06 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd Pagewidth inkjet printer having composite image printing control
EP1296834A1 (en) * 2000-05-23 2003-04-02 Silverbrook Research Pty. Limited Print engine/controller with color mask
EP1296834A4 (en) * 2000-05-23 2005-12-21 Silverbrook Res Pty Ltd Print engine/controller with color mask
EP1289766A4 (en) * 2000-05-24 2005-12-21 Silverbrook Res Pty Ltd Print engine/controller and printhead interface chip incorporating the engine/controller
US7980648B2 (en) 2000-05-24 2011-07-19 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd Print engine controller utilizing on and off chip memory for dot data formatting
EP1289766A1 (en) * 2000-05-24 2003-03-12 Silverbrook Research Pty. Limited Print engine/controller and printhead interface chip incorporating the engine/controller
US7959066B2 (en) 2000-05-24 2011-06-14 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd Controller having tag encoder for printhead
JP4694086B2 (en) * 2000-05-24 2011-06-01 シルバーブルック リサーチ ピーティワイ リミテッド Printing engine / controller and printhead interface chip incorporating the engine / controller
CN1812474B (en) * 2000-05-24 2010-05-12 西尔弗布鲁克研究有限公司 Printing controller with label coder
US7645011B2 (en) 2000-05-24 2010-01-12 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd Print engine controller for receiving dot data
JP2003534172A (en) * 2000-05-24 2003-11-18 シルバーブルック リサーチ ピーティワイ リミテッド Printing engine / controller and printhead interface chip incorporating the engine / controller
US7407247B2 (en) 2000-05-24 2008-08-05 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd Controller which generates data suitable for inkjet printhead
US7369270B1 (en) 2000-05-24 2008-05-06 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd Print engine/controller and printhead interface chip incorporating the engine/controller
US7150510B2 (en) 2000-05-24 2006-12-19 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd Print engine controller for an inkjet printhead assembly having infrared tag control
US6992791B2 (en) 2000-06-30 2006-01-31 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd Print engine/controller with half-toner/compositor
EP1301351A4 (en) * 2000-06-30 2004-09-15 Silverbrook Res Pty Ltd Controlling the timing of printhead nozzle firing
AU2004214600B2 (en) * 2000-06-30 2006-04-06 Memjet Technology Limited A pagewidth printhead defining an array of nozzles with predetermined groupings
US6977751B1 (en) 2000-06-30 2005-12-20 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd Print engine/controller to work in multiples and a printhead driven by multiple print engine/controllers
EP1301350A4 (en) * 2000-06-30 2005-03-16 Silverbrook Res Pty Ltd Print engine/controller to work in multiples and a printhead driven by multiple print engine/controllers
US7148992B2 (en) 2000-06-30 2006-12-12 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd Print engine/controller chip with CPU
EP1301351A1 (en) * 2000-06-30 2003-04-16 Silverbrook Research Pty. Limited Controlling the timing of printhead nozzle firing
EP1301350A1 (en) * 2000-06-30 2003-04-16 Silverbrook Research Pty. Limited Print engine/controller to work in multiples and a printhead driven by multiple print engine/controllers
JP2004501813A (en) * 2000-06-30 2004-01-22 シルバーブルック リサーチ ピーティワイ リミテッド Timing control of print head nozzle injection
SG152036A1 (en) * 2000-06-30 2009-05-29 Silverbrook Res Pty Ltd A pagewidth printhead defining an array of nozzles with predetermined groupings
AU2005200474B2 (en) * 2000-06-30 2006-04-06 Memjet Technology Limited Print engine/controller configured to synchronize output from half-toner/compositor to printhead
US7978372B2 (en) 2000-06-30 2011-07-12 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd Printhead driven by multiple print engine controllers
US7139091B2 (en) 2000-06-30 2006-11-21 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd Printer with synchronized engine/controllers
US7038809B2 (en) 2000-06-30 2006-05-02 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd Print engine/controller with printhead interface
AU2005200474B8 (en) * 2000-06-30 2006-08-31 Memjet Technology Limited Print engine/controller configured to synchronize output from half-toner/compositor to printhead
US8020966B2 (en) 2001-03-27 2011-09-20 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd Ink channel extrusion module for pagewidth printhead
US8070275B2 (en) * 2001-03-27 2011-12-06 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd Method for assembling a modular printhead assembly
AU2002319010B2 (en) * 2001-08-31 2005-07-14 Zamtec Limited Printer including printhead capping mechanism
WO2003018316A1 (en) * 2001-08-31 2003-03-06 Silverbrook Research Pty. Ltd. Printer including printhead capping mechanism
US7556371B2 (en) 2002-02-13 2009-07-07 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd Inkjet printer with a capping device
AU2003202630B2 (en) * 2002-02-13 2007-03-29 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd Printer with capping device
CN1311977C (en) * 2002-02-13 2007-04-25 西尔弗布鲁克研究有限公司 Printer with capping device
US8042934B2 (en) 2002-02-13 2011-10-25 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd Capping device for hand-held printer
US7144107B2 (en) 2002-02-13 2006-12-05 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd Printer with capping device
US8382278B2 (en) 2002-02-13 2013-02-26 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd Capping device for hand-held printer
WO2003068513A1 (en) * 2002-02-13 2003-08-21 Silverbrook Research Pty. Ltd. Printer with capping device
GB2387817A (en) * 2002-04-27 2003-10-29 Hewlett Packard Co Page wide array inkjet printer having halftone controller and multiple printheads, each printing different image strips.
US8860971B2 (en) 2011-11-22 2014-10-14 Seiko Epson Corporation Printing device and printing method of printing device
CN103862879A (en) * 2014-01-15 2014-06-18 珠海艾派克微电子有限公司 Ink box chip and ink box employing same
CN109034142A (en) * 2018-09-29 2018-12-18 广州微印信息科技有限公司 A kind of photo processing method based on image recognition
CN110406265A (en) * 2019-05-06 2019-11-05 珠海艾派克微电子有限公司 Nozzle print cartridge and circuit substrate
CN112181870A (en) * 2020-09-17 2021-01-05 重庆大学 Memory page management method, device and equipment and readable storage medium
CN115593098A (en) * 2021-06-28 2023-01-13 细美事有限公司(Kr) Preheating method of substrate processing apparatus and computer program for the same

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
EP1128961B1 (en) 2009-04-29
CN1508013A (en) 2004-06-30
KR20040104715A (en) 2004-12-10
JP2009188985A (en) 2009-08-20
KR100577357B1 (en) 2006-05-08
KR20040106499A (en) 2004-12-17
EP1128961A4 (en) 2007-05-16
KR100577056B1 (en) 2006-05-08
JP2003508827A (en) 2003-03-04
KR100576744B1 (en) 2006-05-03
CN1277678C (en) 2006-10-04
JP2009184347A (en) 2009-08-20
KR100577022B1 (en) 2006-05-08
DE69940824D1 (en) 2009-06-10
KR20040104720A (en) 2004-12-10
KR20040104714A (en) 2004-12-10
JP2009119870A (en) 2009-06-04
KR20010107956A (en) 2001-12-07
KR20040104718A (en) 2004-12-10
KR100577088B1 (en) 2006-05-08
KR100622619B1 (en) 2006-09-19
KR100577025B1 (en) 2006-05-08
ATE430443T1 (en) 2009-05-15
KR100576605B1 (en) 2006-05-04
JP2009124715A (en) 2009-06-04
KR20040104716A (en) 2004-12-10
CN1508014A (en) 2004-06-30
CN1138636C (en) 2004-02-18
CN1284673C (en) 2006-11-15
AU1533600A (en) 2000-05-29
JP4621766B2 (en) 2011-01-26
KR100576642B1 (en) 2006-05-04
KR20040104719A (en) 2004-12-10
CN1326403A (en) 2001-12-12
EP1128961A1 (en) 2001-09-05
KR20040104717A (en) 2004-12-10

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US6687022B1 (en) Multiple simultaneous access
AU2002319010B2 (en) Printer including printhead capping mechanism
WO2000027640A1 (en) Printer and methods of operation
US7540602B2 (en) Inkjet printer with a protective print media input tray
AU2002319010A1 (en) Printer including printhead capping mechanism
US7571972B2 (en) Printer with a processor having bused decoding and expansion units

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 99813084.2

Country of ref document: CN

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2000 15336

Country of ref document: AU

Kind code of ref document: A

AK Designated states

Kind code of ref document: A1

Designated state(s): AE AL AM AT AU AZ BA BB BG BR BY CA CH CN CR CU CZ DE DK DM EE ES FI GB GD GE GH GM HR HU ID IL IN IS JP KE KG KP KR KZ LC LK LR LS LT LU LV MA MD MG MK MN MW MX NO NZ PL PT RO RU SD SE SG SI SK SL TJ TM TR TT TZ UA UG US UZ VN YU ZA ZW

AL Designated countries for regional patents

Kind code of ref document: A1

Designated state(s): GH GM KE LS MW SD SL SZ TZ UG ZW AM AZ BY KG KZ MD RU TJ TM AT BE CH CY DE DK ES FI FR GB GR IE IT LU MC NL PT SE BF BJ CF CG CI CM GA GN GW ML MR NE SN TD TG

121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application
DFPE Request for preliminary examination filed prior to expiration of 19th month from priority date (pct application filed before 20040101)
WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 1999957714

Country of ref document: EP

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2000 580843

Country of ref document: JP

Kind code of ref document: A

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 1020017005870

Country of ref document: KR

WWP Wipo information: published in national office

Ref document number: 1999957714

Country of ref document: EP

REG Reference to national code

Ref country code: DE

Ref legal event code: 8642

WWP Wipo information: published in national office

Ref document number: 1020017005870

Country of ref document: KR

WWG Wipo information: grant in national office

Ref document number: 1020017005870

Country of ref document: KR